VOLUME 12
NUMBER 2
VOLUME 12
NUMBER
19 9 8
DEDICATED TO PAUL G. WILSON
Western Australian Herbarium
Department of Conservation and Land Management
Western Australia
NUYTSIA
Published by the Department of Conservation
and Land Management, Locked Bag 1 04, Bentley
Delivery Centre, Western Australia 6983.
All papers should be submitted to Dr Barbara
Rye, Editor, Nuytsia.
Email: Barbarar@calm.wa.gov.au
SCIENCE PUBLICATIONS UNIT
Coordinator: K.F. Kenneally
Editor: M.R.L. Lewis
Assistant Editor: J.W. Searle
The journals Nuytsia and CALMScience are
products of the Science Publications Unit which
links the work of two CALM divisions:
CALMScience and Corporate Relations. They
form part of the latter's Programs and Publications
section. Their purpose is to present the scientific
work of CALM to a professional readership on a
regular basis.
NUYTSIA EDITORIAL ADVISORY
COMMITTEE
B.L. Rye (Nuytsia Editor)
J.R. Wheeler (Assistant Editor)
B.J. Lepschi
T.D. Macfarlane
N.G. Marchant
J.W. Searle (Editorial Assistant/Page
Preparation)
ENQUIRIES
Enquiries regarding distribution and
subscriptions should be addressed to the
Marketing Manager, Corporate Relations
Division, Department of Conservation and Land
Management, Locked Bag 29, Bentley Delivery
Centre, Western Australia 6983.
Phone: (08) 9334 0296 Fax: (08) 9334 0498
© Copyright CALM, 1 998. ISSN 0085-44 1 7
All material in this journal is copyright and may
not be reproduced except with the written
permission of the publishers.
Department of Conservation and Land
Management, Western Australia
CONTENTS
Page
Dedication to Paul Graham Wilson. By N.G. Marchant 161
Beaufortia aestiva (Myrtaceac): a new species from the northern kwongan of the
South-West Botanical Province, Australia.
By K.J. Brooks, A. A. Burbidge and A.S. George 163
Sphaerolobium puhescens and Sphaerolohium rostratum (Leguminosae: Mirbelieae),
new species from Western Australia. By R. Butcher 171
Brachylowa nguba (Epacridaccae), a new species from the south-west of
Western Australia. By R.J. Cranlield 179
Xanthosia eichleri, a new species of Apiaceae from Western Australia.
By J.M. Hart and M.J. Henwood 185
Notes on the genus Lepidium (Brassicaceae) in Western Australia, including
recognition of a new species, L amelum. By B.J. Lepschi 191
Three new triggerplant species in Stylidium subgenus Centridium (Stylidiaceae)
from Western Australia. By A. Lowrie and K.F. Kenneally 197
A taxonomic revision of Dicrastylis sect. Dicrastylis (Lamiaceae subfamily
Chloanthoideae). By B.L. Rye and M.E. Trudgen 207
Anthotium odontophyllum (Goodeniaceae), a new species from Western Australia.
By L.W. Sage 229
New subspecies of Goodenia drummondii and G. laevis (Goodeniaceae)
from the south-west of Western Australia. By L.W. Sage 233
A taxonomic review of the genera Eriostemon and Philotheca (Rutaceae; Boronieae).
By Paul G. Wilson 239
New species and nomenclatural changes in Phebalium and related genera (Rutaceae).
By Paul G. Wilson 267
Short Communications
Taxonomy of Diplopeltis huegelii (Sapindaceae). By G.J. Keighery 289
A new subspecies of Grevillea variifolia (Proteaceac). By G.J. Keighery 293
Two new synonyms in the genus Pityrodia (Lamiaceae subfamily Chloanthoideae).
By B.L. Rye and M.E. Trudgen 297
Status and identification of Goodenia filiformis (Goodeniaceae).
By L.W. Sage and J.P. Pigott 501
The name Leplorhynchos linearis and the type of Leptorhynchos (Asteraceae).
By Paul G. Wilson 303
Con.servation Codes for Western Australian Flora 307
Publication date ot' Nuytsia Volume 12 Number I 307
Notes for Authors 308
Western Australian Herbarium,
Department of Conservation and Land Management,
Locked Bag 104, Bentley Delivery Centre, Western Australia 6983
Cover
Nuytsia floribunda (Labill.) R. Br. ex Fenzl (Loranthaceae) - the Western Australian Christmas Tree is one of the few
arborescent mistletoes in the world. This endemic tree is a semi-parasite common in sandy soil from the Murchison River to
Israelite Bay. The journal is named after the plant, which in turn commemorates Pieter Nuijts, an ambassadorof the Dutch East
India Company, who in 1627 accompanied the “Guide Zeepard” on one of the first explorations along the south coast of
Australia,
Cover design by Sue Marais
Photograph A. S. George
Nuytsia 12(2):161(I998)
161
DEDICATION TO PAUL GRAHAM WILSON
This issue of Nuytsia is dedicated to Paul Graham Wilson to recognize the enormous contribution
he has made to Australian plant taxonomy and to celebrate his 70th birthday in 1998.
Although Paul retired from the Western Australian Herbarium on January 2, 1 993 he has continued
to maintain his high productivity, dedicating most of his time to taxonomic research on the Western
Australian tJora. In addition to his systematic studies he has made a major contribution to the Herbarium
effort towards maintaining a comprehensive census of the State llora, extending well beyond his
expertise in Asteraceae, Chenopodiaceae and Rutaceae.
Paul has been the most prolific contributor to Nuytsia since the inaugural issue published on
December 1, 1970 and it is fitting that this issue is dedicated to his productivity. The very first paper
in TVwytx/a Volume 1 was on the systematicsofthree genera of Rutaceae. Paul has continued to publish
his taxonomic revisions of genera in this family as well as in Asteraceae in the present volume.
Dr Neville G. Marchant, Director, Western Australian Herbarium
162
Nuytsia Vol. 12, No. 2 (1998)
Nuytsia 12(2):163-169(1998)
163
Beaufortia aestiva (Myrtaceae): a new species from the northern
kwongan of the South-West Botanical Province, Australia
K.J. Brooks', A. A. Burbidge^ and A.S. George'
'Biological Sciences, Murdoch University, Western Australia 6150
- Department of Conservation and Land Management, Wildlife Research Centre, PO Box 51,
Wanneroo, Western Australia 6065
Abstract
Beaufortia aestiva (Myrtaceae), a new species from the northern kwongan of the South-West
Botanical Province, Australia. Nuytsia 12 (2); 163-169 (1998). Beaufortia aestiva K.J. Brooks is
described and illustrated. It is closely allied to B. squarrosa Schauer and was previously determined
as this species. Extending south from Eurardy Station to Eneabba and south-east to Tammin, it prefers
shallow sand on a lateritic substrate. It is cultivated in the Perth metropolitan region and flowers
abundantly from October to February.
Introduction
The species described here as Beaufortia aestiva occurs in the northern kwongan of the South-West
Botanical Province of Western Australia. The genus SeaM/orti'a R. Br. is endemic in Western Australia
(Lamont etal. 1 984) and is confined to the South-West Botanical Province, except B. dampieri A. Cunn.
which extends into the Eremean Botanical Province in the Shark Bay area. Brown (1812) described
the genus, naming it in honour of Mary Somerset, Duchess of Beaufort and owner of two botanic gardens
(Wrigley & Fagg 1993).
A member of the Myrtaceae, the genus Beaufortia is in the subfamily Leptospermoideae and is
placed in the Me/a/eMca suballiance within {huLeptospermum alliance. This is an informal classification
proposed by Briggs & Johnson ( 1 979) which is likely to undergo revision with increasing knowledge
(Johnson & Briggs 1984; Gadck et al. 1996).
The genus is closely allied to Regelia Schauer. The two differ in that members of Regelia have four
ovules per locule, and anthers that open outwards in longitudinal slits. Beaufortia has one ovule per
locule, and there arc transverse slits at the apex of the anther (Marchant et al. 1987; Wrigley & Fagg
1993). Members of Beaufortia share the characteristics of Johnson & Briggs’s (1984) Beaufortia
infra-alliance: five petals and five staminal bundles attached at the rim of a hypanthium, each staminal
bundle and petal being opposite one of the five sepals; a pubescent perigynous ovary and filiform style
with a small stigma; and filaments with basifixed anthers.
!64
Nuytsia Vol. 12, No. 2 (1998)
Until now, collections of B. aestiva have been included in the species B. squarrosa Schauer, both
species having ciliale anthers, petals and sepals, glabrous staminal claws and filaments, and squarrose
foliage. Beaufortia squarrosa was described by Schauer in 1844. Ludwig Preiss collected the type
specimen from the Canning River in 1841, recording ‘Buno’ as the aboriginal name (Schauer 1845).
The species extends as far north as Encabba and south to the Whicher Range. Examination of material
previously considered to be B. squarrosa has resulted in the recognition of a new species B. aestiva
which is described in this paper. Andrew Burbidge first recognized B. aestiva informally as B. sp. aff.
squarrosa.
Methods
Wherever possible, measurements were taken from fresh material or material preserved in formalin-
acetic-alcohol (FAA), but some measurements were obtained from dried and detergent-softened
herbarium specimens. There was no discernible difference between the measurements taken from
differently treated specimens. Where length and width are recorded, these refer to the longest and widest
section of the organ in question. Plants were observed in the field to determine habit and some
ecological aspects.
Material housed at the Western Australian Herbarium (PERTH) was examined as was Andrew
Burbidge’s collection currently housed at the Wildlife Research Centre, Department of Conservation
and Land Management. The holotype specimen of B. squarrosa was located (at LD) and a photograph
will be lodged in the Western Australian Herbarium (PERTH).
The distributions of both B. squarrosa and B. aestiva were mapped using latitudinal and
longitudinal data provided with the collections. Collections with a general locality were not mapped
but fall within the range indicated by the other collections.
The Latin description was prepared using Steam (1992) as a reference.
Description
Beaufortia aestiva K.J. Brooks
Frutex 0.7-2 m alta. Ramuli pubescentes cum maturitate glabrescentes. Folia opposita, decussata,
subsessilia, ad basin introrsa, supra recurva, late obovata; lamina 4-11 mm longa, .3-7 mm lata,
includcns marginem quinquenervia. Hypanthium 2.5-4 mm longum, glabrum vel sparsim puberulum.
Sepala late triangularia, trinervia, ciliata, glabra. Petala anguste elliptica, 4. 3-5.5 mm longa, 1.4-2. 6
lata, membranacea, glabra, alutacea ad armcniaca. marginibus involutis, ciliatis. Fasciculus staminalis
18-33 mm longus, ad dimidium divisus staminibus 5-7, glaber, luteolus ad flammeus; filamentum
longissimum 1 8-34 mm longum, brevissimum 14-16 mm longum; anthcrarum margo apicalisciliatus.
Stylus ruber, 21-29 mm longus, stamina aequans vel excedens. Fructus persistens, 7-9 mm longus,
6-8 mm latus, 2-16-fasciculalus, saepe circa 8, rasilis, glaber, fuscus. Semina alata, 5-6 mm longa,
1-1.5 mm lata.
Typits: 4 km north of Binnu on old section of highway to the west of North West Coastal Highway,
Western Australia, latitude 28‘’0rS, longitude 1 14°40'E, 25 December 1996, K.J. Brooks 96004
(holo: PERTH 0495 1719; iso: CANS, K, NSW),
K.J. Brooks et at., Beaufortia aestiva, new species from northern kwongan of S-W Botanical Province
165
Dense rounded or spreading shrub 0.7-2 m tall and to 2 m across. New branchlets pubescent,
glabresccnt with maturity. Leaves opposite, decussate, adjacent pairs overlapping, shortly petiolate;
blade introrsc at base becoming recurved, obovate to broadly obovate, 4-1 1 mm long, 3-7 mm wide,
having an obtuse to slightly cuspidate apex, distinctly 5(-9)-veined including margin, glabrous;
abaxial surface prominently punctate. Inflorescence terminal, subglobular, 35-45 mm across; flowers
c. 12-25, all male, all bisexual, or both together. Hypanthium turbinate, 2.5-4 mm long, glabrous to
sparsely puberulous with glossy colourless lo white hairs. Sepals broadly triangular, 1.25-3.3 mm
long, 1-3.5 mm wide, coriaceous, 3-veined, ciliate (most pronounced towards base); external surface
of the lobes glabrous, smooth, green lo pale yellowish-green, the internal surface with an indumentum
of sparse, appressed, soft, glossy, simple trichomes. Petals narrowly elliptic, 4. 3-5. 5 mm long,
1.4-2. 6 mm wide, membranous, glabrous, cream to pale orange-red, deeper colouring confined to
central area of petals; margins involute on fresh specimens, ciliate. Staminal bundles 1 8-34 mm long,
divided halfway into slender claw and free filaments, glabrous, yellow with red band on claw to deep
red throughout; bundles consisting of 5-7(10) filaments of unequal length, the longest filament
(including claw) 18-34 mm long, the shortest 14-16 mm long; number of filaments per bundle variable
within the same flower; apical margin of anthers ciliate. Style red, 21-29 mm long, level with or
exceeding longest stamen by up to 4 mm. Fruits persistent, 7-9 mm long, 6-8 mm wide, in clusters
of 2-16, frequently c. 8, smooth, glabrous, silvery brown. Seeds one per locule, winged, 5-6 mm long,
1-1 .5 mm wide. (Figure 1 )
Selected specimens examined (all at PERTH). WESTERN AUSTR.'\LIA: 7 km SSE of Junga Dam,
Kalbarri Natl Park, S.D. Hopper 1260; 37 km W of North West Coastal Highway on Kalbarri road,
R.J. Hnatiukl%{)?>5%\ 25 km Eof Binnu, C.A. Gardner 12314; East Yuna [Nature] Reserve, B.G. Muir
429 (3. 10); 8.8 km S on Moore Road from turnoff on Gerald ton-Mullewa road, K.F. Kenneally 1 1 132;
25kmEofYandanooka,A. Carr 165; 8 km SW of Mt Campbell (between Three Springs andMorawa),
L.A. Craven 7006; 3 km W of Lake Indoon, E.A. Griffin 3029 & M. Blackwell', [Reynoldson] Reserve,
SE of Kondut, A.S. George 508; Tammin, C.A. Gardner 1111.
Distribution. Beaufortia aestiva is distributed throughout the north-western region of the extra-dry
mediterranean bioclimatic zone (Beard 1984). Relatively small populations are found in clusters
extending north from Tammin to the vicinity of Kalbarri National Park (between latitudes 27"20'S and
31°30'S). A large number of populations have been recorded between Kalbarri, Binnu, Yuna and
Mullcwa. A cluster of populations has been recorded from Mingenew and another around Three
Springs. Several populations occur from approximately 35 km north to 25 km south of Eneabba. Four
collections have been recorded from Wongan Hills. Several collections were made near Tammin up
to 1921 but only one since then, the collector noting a single plant (Livesey, W of Tammin, 8 Nov.
1 994, L. Atkins HLA 181, PERTH). The species is also known from a single col lection north of Eurardy
Station (latitude 26"58'57 "S, longitude 1 13“ 5 r47''E). The discontinuity in the clusters of B. aestiva
from Mingenew to 'rammin may be a result of clearing for agriculture, the localities being within the
midwest whcatbell, but ecological aspects have not been studied. (Figure 2)
Habitat. Beaufortia aestiva usually grows on the upper slopes or ridges of undulating sandy plains.
These are commonly deep yellow or brown sands formed over a laterite substrate. The species has also
been recorded growing in shallow grey sand over a limestone cap. Closed heath to low shrubland
predominates on these soils and B. aestiva grows amongst species of Actinostrobus, Verticordia,
Hakeu, Calotliamnus, Eremaea, Acacia, Banksia and emergent Grevillea spp. or Xylomelum
angiistifolium.
Phenology. The peak flowering period is between October and February; but B. aestiva flowers from
July to late March, and has been collected once at Ajana Dowering in May.
Nuytsia Vol. 12, No. 2 (1998)
1 66
Figure 1 . Beauforiia uestiva. A - portion of llowcring branchlet, B - single flower, C - single leaf .showing main venation,
D - seed capsule, E - seed. Drawn by Christine McCotnb from material cultivated at Kings Park and Botanic Garden.
K.J. Brooks et al, Beaufortia aesliva, new species from northern kwongan of S-W Botanical Province
167
Figure 2. Distribution of Beaufortia aestiva 0 and B. squarrosa O-
Conservation status. Beaufortia aestiva is not considered rare or threatened.
Etymology. The name is derived from the Latin adjective aestivus (of summer), in reference to its
abundant ilowering over the summer period.
Biology. Much of the biology of B. ae.ttiva is unknown. The species is bradysporous, retaining its fruits
for at least three years, possibly longer. Field observations have shown no dehiscence of the capsule
while it is retained on the plant . Not surprisingly, the number of fruits in a cluster tends to be indicative
of the ratio ol bisexual to male flowers; thus, specimens from the Eneabba area generally have fewer
male flowers per inflorescence and larger clusters of fruits. However, the ratio of male to bisexual flowers
is variable throughout the species distribution. Both wasps and bees (unidentified) have been observed
feeding from the Bowers in the field. The plants are non-lignotuberous, being killed by fire and
regenerating from seed.
Cultivation. Already cultivated in the Perth metropolitan region, the species makes a good ornamental
shrub due to its dense, rounded, habit and large showy Bowers throughout much of the year.
168
Nuylsia Vol. 12, No. 2 (1998)
Variation. Within B. aestiva stamen colour varies from a biscuit-yellow to deep red throughout its
range. The yellow form is most common in northern populations. Variation is also seen in the number
of filaments per staminal bundle In some specimens collected from north of Yuna to north-north-cast
of Eurardy Station {F.W. Went 54; B.G. Muir 429), the number of stamens increases from 5-7 per
bundle to 7-9 per bundle, although occasionally 6 or 10 occur. This variation is most easily seen in
specimens in A. A. Burbidge's collection (D.J. Mell 2, 7, 8, 9, 10 and 1 1).
Specimens from the Eneabba area have a tendency towards broadly obovate and slightly larger,
more recurved leaves than those found in other populations. In addition, the leaves are commonly
distinctly 7-veined (C. Chapman 1975; H. Demarz D3386), including the margin, as opposed to the
more usual 5 veins. In some specimens 9 veins are present on some leaves, in others there appears to
be a seasonal change between 5- and 7-veined leaves {E.A. Grijfin 3029; R.J. HnatiukllQOQ%). The
Eneabba populations also show a tendency towards larger fruit clusters, commonly having 13 to 16
fruits in acluster. It is possible that further work on the species would yield subspecies or at least variants
of B. aestiva.
Cytological studies on B. squarrosa by Rye (1979) included specimens now considered to be
B. aestiva as well as true B. squarrosa. These were found to have a haploid number of 8 or a diploid
number of 1 6 chromosomes- a specimen from Yuna was recorded as c. 8. However, the specimens used
in the study did not cover all the variation in stamen number or venation mentioned above. The
specimens of B. aestiva used by Rye ( 1 979) are databased in PERTH as B.L Powell 74075 & 74097
and B.L. Rye 76018.
Affinities. Until now, collections of B. aestiva have been determined as B. squarrosa. With closer
examination the new species is clearly different. Beaufortia aestiva is most readily distinguished from
B. squarrosa in the following ways. Leaves lend to be more broadly obovate, brighter green and are
introrse only at the base; the hypanthium is glabrous as opposed to pubescent in B. squarrosa, and the
ratio of tube to sepal length is c. 2: 1 rather than 1 : 1 ; the calyx lobes arc broadly triangular rather than
triangular; although the staminal bundles of both species are of similar length, the claw to free filament
ratio is 1: 1 in 5. aestiva and 2: 1 in B. squarrosa and there is an increase in stamen number from 3 or
4 stamens per bundle in B. squarrosa to 5-7 stamens (occasionally to 10) per bundle; the fruit is larger
at 7-9 mm long and 6-8 mm wide, whereas the fruits of B. squarrosa is 4-6 mm long and 4-5.5 mm
wide; the number of fruits in a cluster is commonly greater in the new species. In the field, B. aestiva
tends to have a denser habit than B. squarrosa.
Acknowledgements
Dr Neville Marchant, director of the Western Australian Herbarium (PERTH), allowed access to the
herbarium collection. We are grateful to Christine McComb for preparing the botanical illustration
and to Grady Brand, of Kings Park and Botanic Garden, for providing the cultivated material used for
illustrative purposes. Associate Professor Jen McComb, Murdoch University, gave enthusiastic
assistance.
K..I. Brooks et al., Beaufortia aestiva, new species from northern kwongan of S-W Botanical Province
169
References
Beard, J.S. (1984). Biogcography of the Kwongan. /n: Pate, J.S, & Beard, J.S. (eds) “Kwongan Plant Life of the
Sandplain.” (University of Western Australia Press; Nedlands.)
Briggs, B.G. & Johnson, L.A.S, (1979). Evolution in the Myrtaceae - evidence from inflorescence structure. Proceedings
of the Linnean Society of New South Wales 102; 157-256.
Brown, K. (1812). Genera et species quaedam plantarum Myrtaccarum quae in Horto Kewensi coluntur. Aiton’s “Hortus
Kewensis” 2nd edn. IV; 410-^19. (Longman et at.: London.)
Gadek, P.A., Wilson, P.G. & Quinn. C.J. (1996). Phylogenetic reconstruction in Myrtaceae using mat K with particular
reference to the position of Psiloxylon and Heteropyxis. Australian Systematic Botany 9; 283-290.
Johnson, L.A..S. & Briggs. B.G. (1984). MyrUilcs and Myrtaceae - a phylogenetic analysis. Annals of the Missouri
Botanical Garden 71; 700-756.
Lament, B.B., Hopkins, A.J.M. & Hnatiuk, R.J. (1984). The flora composition, diversity and origins. In: Pate, J.S. &
Beard, J.S. (eds) “Kwongan Plant Life of the Sandplain." (University of Western Australia Press; Nedlands.)
Marchant. N.G., Wheeler, J.R., Rye B.L., Bennett. E.M., Lander, N.S. & Macfarlane, T.D. (1987). “Flora of the Perth
Region.” Part 1. (Western Australian Herbarium; Perth.)
Rye, B.L. (1979). Chromosome number variation in the Myrtaceae and its taxonomic implications. Australian Journal
of Botany 27: 547-573.
Schauer, J.C. (1845). Dissertatio phytographica de Regelia, Beaufortia et Calothamno, generibus plantarum Myrtacearum.
Nova acta Academiue Caesareae Ixtopoldino-Carolinae Germanicae Naturae Curiosorum 21; 1-32.
Steam, W.T, (1992). “Botanical Latin.” 4(h edn. (David and Charles; Newton Abbot. Devon.)
Wrigley, J.W & Fagg, M. (1993). “Bottlebrushes Paperbarks and Tea Trees, and all Other Plants in the Leptospermum
Alliance.” (Angus and Robertson; Sydney.)
170
Nuytsia Vol. 12, No. 2 (1998)
Nuytsia 12(2):171-178(1998)
171
Sphaerolobium pubescens and Sphaerolobium rostratum
(Leguminosae: Mirbelieae), new species from Western Australia
Ryonen Butcher
Department of Botany, The University of Western Australia, Nedlands, Western Australia 6907
Abstract
Butcher, R. Sphaerolobium pubescens and Sphaerolobium rostratum (Leguminosae: Mirbelieae),
new species from Western Australia. Nuytsia 1 2 (2): 1 7 1- 1 78 ( 1 998) . Two new species of Sphaerolobium
from the south-west of Western Australia are here described and distinguished from similar species.
Sphaerolobium pubescens R. Butcher is a yellow-flowered species possessing spreading white hairs
on the calyx, bracts, bracteoles and pedicel and Sphaerolobium rostratum R. Butcher has a pink and
cream corolla and a distinctive rostrate apex to the keel petal.
Introduction
As currently recognized, the genus Sphaerolobium Sm. (Leguminosae: Mirbelieae) contains 14
species, 1 1 of which are endemic to the south-west of Western Australia and occur between Kalbarri
in the north and Israelite Bay in the east, wilh a marked concentration along the south coast between
Margaret River and Albany. Of the three species found in the eastern states, only S. vimineum Sm. also
grows in Western Australia, 5. acanthosCiKp being restricted to the Grampians in Victoria and S. minus
Labill. being found in New South Wales, Victoria, Tasmania, Queensland and the Australian Capital
Territory (Hnatiuk 1 990; Crisp 1993, 1994). Whilst some recent work has been performed by Crisp
(1993, 1994) on members of the group from the eastern states, the genus has not been reviewed in full
since Bentham’s treatment in “Flora Australiensis” ( 1 864) and there are still a number of unresolved
problems wilh the Western Australian taxa.
This paper is presented as the first in a series which will deal with some of the more problematic
areas and pressing changes required in the taxonomy of Sphaerolobium. It provides descriptions of
two new south-western Australian species that were found while preparing a cladistic analysis and
revision of the genus.
Methods
All specimens housed at PERTH were examined and photographs of type material borrowed from
Dr M.D. Crisp ( ANU) were sighted for 22 of the 24 names listed in “Australian Plant Name Index”
(Chapman 1991 ).
172
Nuytsia Vol. 12, No. 2 (1998)
Taxonomy
Sphaerolobium pubescens R. Butcher, sp. nov.
Species calyce viridi-griseo pilis albis patulis, corolla lutea, stipite ovarii latissimo a congeneribus
diversa.
Typiis: Between road and firebreak, 5. 1 km south along theChorkarup-Narrikup road from Chorkarup
Rd, Western Australia, 18 November 1996, R. Butcher, J. Wege & F. Valton RB 24 {holo: PERTH
04896610; iso: CANB).
Subshrub to 0.45 m, up to 0.3 m wide, erect; stems slender, terete. Stipules absent. Leaves opposite
to more or less whorled, sessile, linear-subulate, c. 1 .5 mm long, c. 0.5 mm wide, acute, caducous before
flowering. Inflorescence a dense terminal raceme, basipetal flowering, c. 50 mm long, 20-3 1 -flowered,
2 Bowers per bract. Pedicels c. 1.5 mm long. Rractj caducous. Bracteoles ovate, c. 1.6 mm long,
c. 0.7 mm wide, pubescent, caducous. Calyx grey-brown, turbinate, 2.5-4 mm long, with spreading
white hairs, the tube much shorter than the upper lip; upper lip fused along c. 60% of its length,
2-2.5 mm long, broadly curved; lower lobes lanceolate, 1.5-2 mm long. Corolla yellow; standard
broadly cordate, 4-6 mm long, 4-6 mm wide, including abroadly triangularclaw ofO.3-0.6 mm length,
this with Bat margins and without callosities, I he blade emarginate and auriculate, the eye barely visible
with a halo of red-purple; wings broadly spathulate to oblong, 4.5-5 .5 mm long, 1.5-2 mm wide,
including a claw of c. 0.5 mm length, the apex of the blade obtuse, the adaxial spur sharply angled;
keel shorter than the wings, 3-4.5 mm long, 2-2.5 mm wide, including anarrow claw of c. 1 mm length,
the whole not pouched, the apex truncate to obtuse, the adaxial edge straight, oblique, the spur small,
the abaxial edge gently arcuate. Stamens with filaments 2-3 mm long; anthers rotund, versatile,
dorsifixed, 0.35-0.45 mm long. Gynoecium 6-7 mm long including the distinct broad stipe (c. 1 mm
long, c. 0.5 mm wide) and the style (3-4 mm long); ovary glabrous, uniformly pale yellowish green;
style geniculate, curving adaxially towards ovary, with an undulate, more or less semicircular
(0.6-0.8mmlong,0.4-0.6mm wide),fringedsubapical wing; stigma shortly tufted. PoJatfirstyellow,
brown at maturity, orbicular, broader than long, 2.5-3 mm long, 3 mm wide, obliquely angled towards
style. Seed black at maturity, more or less oval, c. 1 .2 mm long, 1 .5 mm wide, without an aril, testa
smooth. (Figure lA-H)
Other specimens examined . WESTERN AUSTRALIA; 5. 1 km S along Gull Rock Rd from Lower King—
Nannarup road, 10 Oct. 1997, R. Butcher & J. Chappill JC 5892 (PERTH); Nutcracker Rd, 600 m W
of Denmark-Mount Barker road, 19 Nov. 1996, R. Butcher, J. Wege & F. Valton RB 30 (PERTH);
16kmNofAlbanyonHassclHwy,2l Oct. 1983, M.G. Cornc/c8879(MEL);LakeRd,NWLakeWilliam,
West Cape Howe, 3 Nov. 1 990, G. 7. Keighery 1 1978 (PERTH); 6 km Eof WarriupHill, 23 Oct. 1975,
K.R. Newhey 4886 (PERTH); Walpole-Nornalup National Park, Nut Rd, c. 0.5 km N of junction with
Ficifolia Rd, 1 6 Oct. 1 99 \J.R- Wheeler 2786 (PERTH).
Distribution. S. pubescens has been found in the Walpole-Nornalup National Park, near Mt Lindesay
and Narrikup, in West Cape Howe National Park and east of Albany near Ledge Beach and Warriup
Hill in the Green Range. (Figure 2A)
Habitat. S. pubescens has been collected from gently undulating areas with well drained sand over
clay and relatively high moisture availability, as well as seasonally wet swamp Bats. Habitats include
low heath communities and sparse, mixed Casuarina! Eucalyptus woodland, sometimes with scattered
Nuytsia floribunda and Banksia coccinea. Associated vegetation includes Pimelea &pp.. Xanthorrhoea
preissii, X. gracilis, Dasypogon hromeliifolius, mixed sedges and myrtaceous shrubs.
R. Butcher, Sphaerolobium piibescens and S. rostrutum, new species from WA
173
Figure I. Sphaerotabiiiin pubescens. A - single flower showing spreading hairs on the calyx and pedicel; B - standard
petal; C - wing petal; D - keel petal; H - two huds illustrating the spreading hairs on the bracteoles, F - gynoecium
indicating the short, hroad stipe and the broad, fringed stylar wing below the stigma; G - undulating stylar wing and
shortly tufted sligma; II - niature seed. .Scale bar = I mm. Drawn from R. Bulcher, J. We^ijc & F. Valton UB 24.
174
Nuytsia Vol. 12, No. 2 (1998)
Phenology. S. puhescens i'lowers from October through November and sets fruit from November to
January.
Conservation status. Although recent collection of S. puhescens has expanded its known range
somewhat and two populations are in national parks, a Priority Three conservation code is considered
appropriate for this species pending further survey.
Etymology. The specific epithet is the Latin word puhescens and refers to the hairs on the calyx, bracts,
bracteoles and pedicels of this species.
Affinities. S. puhescens is easily distinguished from all other Sphaerolahium species by the long,
spreading hairs on its calyx, bracts, bracteoles and pedicels. Superficially, however, S. puhescens
resembles the eastern Australian species S. minus, as both have small Powers in dense, basipetal,
terminal racemes and both possess uniformly brown to grey calyces. S. puhescens can be differentiated
from 5. minus by its slightly larger, all yellow flowers (c. 7 mm compared with 5-6 mm long), short,
thick stipe and very broad, densely fringed stylar wing. In S. minus the flowers have a red area around
the standard eye, at the ba.se of the wing petals and sometimes at the apex of the keel, the stipe is long
and narrow (1 .2-1 .7 mm long, 0.2 mm wide compared with 1 mm long, 0.5 mm wide), as is the stylar
wing (0.7-1 .6 mm long, 0.25-0.4 mm wide compared with 0.6-0.8 mm long, 0.4-0.6 mm wide).
An as yet undescribed taxon with affinities to the S. macranthum Meisn. complex which has been
collected from near Scott River and the Albany area as well as the Stirling Ranges superficially
resembles S. puhescens in its inflorescence structure and calyx and corolla colour, but can be easily
distinguished by the red base to the wing petals, the prominent keel and the narrower, sparsely fringed
stylar wing. The recognition of this taxon awaits a more extensive study of the S. macranthum complex
to determine its rank.
Sphaerolobium rostratuni R. Butcher, sp. nov.
Calyx turbinatus vel campanulatus, glaber, viridus et atropunctatus. Corolla rosea et aurantiaca;
Carina lata, alls et vexillio multo longior, ad apicem rostrata. Ovarium lutea cum maculis virentibus
ad brunneis ornatum.
Typus: 600 m west of Peaceful Bay Rd along South Coast Highway, Western Australia, 1 1 October 1 997,
R. Butcher & J. Chappill RB 355 {holo: PERTH 05053234; iso: CANB, MEL, NSW).
Suh-shruh to 1 .5 m, width to 0.4 m, erect to sprawling; stems slender, terete. Stipules absent Leaves
opposite, sessile, linear-subulate, c. 1 mm long, c. 0.4 mm wide, acute, caducous before flowering.
Inflorescence a loose terminal raceme, basipetal Powering, 150-350 mm long, 5-20-Powered,
2 Powers per bract. Pedicels 1 .6- 1 .7 mm long. Bracts caducous. Bracteoles ovate, c. 3 mm long,
c. 1 .5 mm wide, caducous. Calyx dark green and darkly punctate, turbinate to campanulate, 4-6 mm
long, glabrous, the tube equal to or slightly longer than the upper lip; upper lip fused along c. 80%
of its length, 2-4 mm long, rounded to truncate; lower lobes lanceolate, 2-3 mm long. Corolla pink
and cream; standard pink, broadly cordate to orbicular, 5-9 mm long, 6-8 mm wide, including a narrow
claw of 2.5-3 mm length, this with prominent callosities at apex and inrolled margins, the blade
ernarginate, auriculate, with a yellow, semicircular standard eye bordered with red; wings dark pink,
oblong, 8-9.5 mm long, 2-4 mm wide, including a narrow claw of 2.5-3 mm length, adaxial spur
sharply angled, the apex of the blade obtuse to truncate; keel cream, infused with pale pink, longer than
R. Butcher, Sphacrolobium pubesceiix and S. nistratum, new species from WA
175
Figure 2. Distribution in the south-we.st of Western Australia. A - Sphaer<)li>hium pubescens. B - Sphaerolohium
ro.stratum.
176
Nuytsia Vol. 12, No. 2 (1998)
the wings and standard, 9-1 1 mm long, 4-5 mm wide, including a narrow claw of 2-3 mm length,
pouched diagonally from spur towards centre, the apex obtuse with distinct acuminate to rostrate apex
(c. 1 mm long), the adaxial edge straight, oblique, adaxial spur triangular, abaxial edge strongly arcuate.
Stamens with filaments c. 7.5 mm long; anthers narrowly ovate, versatile, dorsifixed, 0.6-0.7 mm long.
Gynoecium 13-16 mm long including the stipe (3-3.5 mm long, 0.4-0.5 mm wide) and the style
(6-7.5 mm long); ovary glabrous, egg-yolk yellow with di.stinctive green-brown patches from base;
sty lecurvingadaxially, twistcd jmst below apex, with a flat, narrow ( 1 .5-2 mm long, 0.25-0.5 mm wide),
fringed subapical wing; stigma tufted. Pod light brown with black patches from base, orbicular,
compressed adaxially, c. 4 mm long, c. 3.5-4 mm wide, obliquely angled towards style, cream
and darkly punctate at first, brown with merging black spots at maturity, obovate, c. 1.7 mm long,
c. 2, 1 mm wide, arillate, testa smooth; aril c. 0.2 mm long. (Figure 3A-H)
Other specimens examined. WESTERN AUSTRALIA: Walpole-Nornalup National Park, KA 100054,
PT.306, 6 Sep. 1 988, A. R. Annels 338 (PERTH); Plot 5086, NornalupRd, 24.5 km SSW of Rocky Gully,
28 Sep. 1993, A.R. Annels ARA 3943 (PERTH; MJP); 1 .7 km E of Bow Bridge on South Coast Hwy,
19Nov. 1996,/?. Butcher, J. F. ValtonRB3l (UWA);Denmarkshire,S boundary of proposed
National Park, Nutcracker Rd, 0.5 km W from Denmark-Mount Barker road, 3 Oct. 1991,
B.G. Hammersley 538 (PERTH); Walpole-Nornalup National Park, Isle Rd, c. 0.6 km S of South West
Hwy, 15 Oct. 1991,7./?. Wheeler 2744 (PERTH); Walpole-Nornalup National Park, Isle Rd,c. 0.5 km
S of South We.st Hwy, 1 Dec. 1992,7./?. Wheeler c& S.J. Patricl: 3631 (PERTH); 7 km W of Walpole,
2 Apr. 1967, P.G. Wilson 6327a (PERTH); Coalmine Beach, S of Walpole, 28 Oct. 1994, A. Worz
04. 10.28. 1 3 (PERTH).
Distribution. S. rostratiim has been mostly collected from Walpole-Nornalup National Park and its
surrounds but two outlying collections have been made from near Mt Lindesay to the north-east and
northward towards Lake Surprise on Nornalup Rd. (Figure 2B)
Habitat. S. rostratum is commonly found growing in sandy soil and clayey sand in seasonally wet
sv/amps and Agonis panneeps/Bossiaea shrubland fringing creeks or other moist areas. Associated
vegetation in these habitats includes Homalospermum firmum, Xanthosia rotundifolia, Kunzea
ericifolia and Anarthria scabra as well as Anigozanthus flavidus and Pteridium esculentum in
disturbed sites. The Annels 3943 collection, made from the valley floor, differs in its associated
vegetation and includes Persoonia microcarpa, Banksia quercifolia, Cosmelia rubra, Callistemon
gluuca, Sphenotoma gracile and Cephalotus follicularis, suggesting a different habitat and therefore
the possibility of more dispersed collections being made for the species.
Phenology. S. /•ostratMW flowers between Septemberand December and fruits from Octoberlo January.
Conservation status. S. rostratum appears restricted to the Warren Botanical District with only two
populations located outside the Walpole-Nornalup National Park. A Priority Three conservation code
is therefore recommended.
Etymology. The specific epithet is derived from the Latin word rostratus meaning “beaked” and refers
to the distinctive apex of the keel petals.
Affinities. S. rostratum is superficially similar to S. grandiflorum Benth. as both possess large
(7-11 mm long) flowers and calyces that are dark green and darkly punctate with the tube
approximately equal in length to the upper lobes. S. grandiflorum can be differentiated from
S. rostratum, however, by a distinct black line along the margins of its calyx lobes as well as its
R. Butcher, Sphaerolobium pubescens and S. rostratum, new species from WA
177
Figure 3. SphaerolDbium rosintliiin. A - single flower illustrating the length of the keel relative to the other petals and
the darkly punctate calyx; B - standard petal showing the semicircular eye and the large callosities on the claw; C - wing
petal; D - keel petal with rostrate apex; B - gynoecium indicating the long, narrow stipe, the ovary with dark patches
from its base and the narrow, twisted stylar wing; F - flat stylar wing with tufted stigma; G - mature seed with cream
anl; H - lop surface of seed showing aril surrounding hilar fissure, Scale bar = I mm. Drawn from R. Butcher &
J. Chappill RB 355.
178
Nuytsia Vol. 12, No. 2 (1998)
geniculate keel petal with an obtuse apex which is shorter than the standard (7. 5-8. 5 mm long compared
with 9- 1 1 mm long). Additionally , 5. grundiflonim has adark green-hrown to black ovary and a sharply
curved style which twists 360'’ near the broad, densely fringed slylar wing as pods develop. The green
and darkly punctate calyx and prominent keel apex of 5. rostratum draws comparison with S. medium
R. Br. but this latter taxon can be easily differentiated by its shorter, somewhat sprawling habit
(0.4-0.8 m tall. 0.3-0. 6 m wide compared with 0.8-1 .5 m tall, c. 0.4 m wide), smaller (6-8 mm long
compared with 9-1 1 mm long) yellow to pink (lowers, more dense intlorescences (20-60 compared
with 5-20 (lowers) and the calyx tube shorter than the lobes. Additionally, S. medium has a more or
less oblong keel with an aeuminate apex, whilst that of S. rostratum is broadly curved, rostrate and
considerably longer in relation to the other petals. S. mediumcm also be differentiated by its uniformly
pale yellowish green ovary and straight, naked style.
Acknowledgements
I wish to thank my Honours supervisor Dr Jenny Chappill at the University of Western Australia
for her invaluable comments on previous drafts. Dr Michael Crisp from the Australian National
University for the loan of type photographs, and the staff and volunteers at the Western Australian
Herbarium for their help in this study. 1 would also like to thank Mr Paul Wilson for his considerable
help with the Latin component and Judy Wheeler for having a keen eye. My thanks also to the referee
Dr Jim Grimes, and Dr Barbara Rye for their comments on this manuscript.
References
BeiUham, G. (1864). "Flora Aiistraliensis,” Vol. 2. (Reeve & Co.: London.)
Chapman, A.D. (1991). “Ausiralian Plant N,ame Index.” Australian Flora Series, No. 15. (Australian Government
Publishing Service; Canberra.)
Crisp, M.D. (1993). Reinstatement of Sphaerolobiiirn minus (Fabaceae: Mirbelieae). Telopea 5: 335-340.
Crisp, M.D. (1994). Sphaerolobiiirn acunthos (Ftibaceae: Mirbelieae), a new species from the Grampians, Victoria.
Muelleriii 8: 151-154.
Hnatiuk, R..I. (1990). "Census of Australian Vascular Plants.” Australian Flora and Fauna Series, No. 11. (Australian
Government Publishing Service: Canberra.)
Nuytsia 12{2):179-183(1998)
179
Brachyloma nguba (Epacridaceae), a new species from
the south-west of Western Australia
R.J. Cranfield
Western Australian Herbarium, Department of Conservation and Land Management,
Locked Bag 104, Bentley Delivery Centre, Western Australia 6983
Abstract
Cranfield, R.J, Brachyloma nguba (Epacridaceae), a new species from the south-west of Western
Australia. Nuytsia 12 (2): 179-183(1998). A new species endemic to the South West Botanical
Province of Western Australia, Brachyloma nguba Cranfield, is described, illustrated and mapped. A
key to the Western Australian species of Brachyloma (Epacridaceae) is provided.
Introduction
A specimen of Brachyloma (Epacridaceae) collected by the author in March 1997 east of Hyden
was found to be different from the two known Western Australian species, Brachyloma preissii Sond.
and B. concolor F. Muell. ex Benth. Detailed examination showed the material to be a new species.
A subsequent search of herbarium records (PERTH) provided evidence that this sample was a third
collection of this species from the same area.
Methods
All the material examined in this study is held at PERTH. Two or three flowers were measured from
each of the three collections of the new species and the same number of flowers from selected sheets
representing the other two Western Australian species. Measurements of leaves were made to
encompass a range of sizes but exclude the extremes resulting from age and growth variations.
Taxonomy
Diagnostic characters for Western Australian species of Brachyloma are given in Table 1. The
shorter pedicels, calyx lobes and style and the truncate hypogy nous disc separate the new species from
the other two species, Brachyloma concolor and Brachyloma preissii.
It also appears from the table that B. nguba is distinguished by its smaller leaves and revolute leaf
margins, but the table excludes a few atypically small-leaved specimens of uncertain taxonomic status
180
Nuytsia Vol. 12, No. 2 (1998)
that would partially bridge this apparent gap between the new and old species. Both Brachyloma
preissii and Brachyloma concolor appear to contain several entitles that require further investigation
hut are currently known from very little material. These include a small-leaved variant Sonderf 1845)
described as Brachyloma preissii var. brevifolium Sond. More collections are needed to further
elucidate the taxonomy of this complex species group.
Table 1. Characters distinguishing Western Australian species of Brachyloma.
Character
B. nguba
B. preissi
B. concolor
leaf
length (mm)
2.0-3.0
8.0-17.0
5.0-13.0
width (mm)
0
1
b
3.0-4.0
2.5-4.0
petiole length (mm)
0.4-0.6
1.0- 1.6
p
b
section
revolute
flat-convex
Bat-concave
apex
acute-apiculate
acute-apiculate
apiculate
flower
pedicel length (mm)
0.2-0.3
1. 5-2.0
1.0- 1.5
sepal length (mm)
O
T
b
LO-3.5
1.0- 1.5
style length (mm)
0.2-0.25
L5-2.0
1.0- 1.5
hypogynous disc
truncate
shallowly 5-lobed
prominently 5-lobed
ovary locules
3,4
4,5
5
Key to Western Australian species oi Brachyloma
1. Leaves concave, concolorous. Style 1 .5-2.0 mm long. Disc
prominently 5-lobed B. concolor
1. Leaves flat to revolute, discolorous. Style 0. 2-1.5 mm long. Disc
shallowly 5-lobed to truncate
2. Leaves usually 8-17 x 3-4 mm. Style 1-1.5 mm long. Disc shallowly
5-lobed B. preissii
2. Leaves usually 2-3 x c. 0.9 mm. Style 0.2-0.25 mm long. Disc truncate B. nguba
Brachyloma nguba Cranficld, sp. nov.
Brachylomi preissii similis sed foliis ininoribus ad margines recurvis, stylo c. 0.25 mm
(v. 1-1.5 mm) brevivore differt.
Typus: 50 km east-north-east ofHyden (32‘ 24' 45", 1 19‘ 23' 29"), Western Australia, 7 April 1997,
R.J. Cranfield 11181 {holo: PERTH 04671724; iso: CANB).
Shrub to 40 cm high. Branchlets hispid. Leaves alternate, terminally clustered on short branchlets,
erect; petiole 0.4-0. 6 x 0. 1 -0.2 mm, hispid; lamina narrowly elliptic, 2.0-3.0 x 0.9-1 .0 mm, sparsely
scabrid adaxially, hispid abaxially, with numerous prominent veins; margins recurved; apex acute
with a short mucro. Inflorescence of solitary axillary Powers in terminal leaf clusters. Pedicels
0.2-0. 3 mm long; bractcoles 3, sessile, imbricate, 0.5-1 mm long, margin fringed, apex acute; bracts
R.J. Cranfield, Brachyloma iif’uba, a new species from south-west WA
181
2, 1. 5-2 mm long, margin ciliatc, apex obtuse. 5, imbricate, ovate, 0.5-1 x 0.5-1 .0 mm, green;
margin fringed; apex obtuse. Corolla red; tube urceolate, 3-4.5 x 1 .5-2 mm, throat constricted below
lobes; internal rellexed scales 0.25 x 0.4 mm, with long hairs on apex; lobes 5, spreading, broadly
triangular, 1 .5-2 x c. 1 .5 mm, acute and apex rellexed. Stamens 5', anther linear, 1-1 .25 x c. 0.25 mm,
longitudinally dehiscent. Hypogynous disc truncate, c. 0.25 mm wide. Ovary ovoid, glabrous,
c. 1.1 X 0.9- 1.0 mm, 3- or4-locular; ovules 1 per loculus, white, c. 0.45 x 0. 15 mm, ellipsoid; style
0.20-0.25 mm long. Fruit not seen. (Figure 1)
Figure 1 . Brcuhyloina A - branchlcl, B leaf, C - brad, 1) -- llower, B - anthers and lobes, F - ovary and style,
G — cross-section of ovary. vScalc bars - 1 inni. Drawn from the holotype.
182
Nuytsia Vol. 12, No. 2 (1998)
Other specimens examined. WESTERN AUSTRALIA: 39kmEofPingaring,May \ 969,A.S.George
9339 (PERTH); 64 km E of Hyden, June 1966, Smith & Kessell 1 1 (PERTH).
Distribution. Endemic to the Roe Botanical District in the South West Botanical Province of Western
Australia. This species is known Irom three collections, two from the type area and the remaining one
from Pingaring, all locations being within the eastern wheatbelt. (Figure 2)
Habitat. Open mallee woodland-mallee scrub over white to brown sandy clay.
Flowering time. April to May.
Conservation status. CALM Conservation Code for Western Australian Flora: Priority One. This
species is known from three collections, two from the type area and the third from Pingaring.
Etymology. The specific epithet is from the Nyoongar aboriginal word ngiiba for blood, referring to
the small bright red flowers (Bindon & Chadwick 1992).
Notes. Brachyloma nguba is related to Brachyloma preissii, differing in having many leaf and floral
characters greatly reduced in size, particularly style length, and in its truncate disc.
Figure 2. Distribution of Brachyloma nf/uba.
R.J. Cranfield, Brachyloma nguba, a new species from south-west WA
183
Acknowledgements
The Lalin description was kindly prepared by Mr Paul G. Wilson along with other taxonomic
advice. I also wish to thank Barbara Rye and John Hunter for their comments.
References
Bindon, P. & Chadwick, R. (1992). ‘A Nyoongar Wordlist from the South-West of Western Australia.” (Western
Australian Museum: Perth.)
Sender, O.G. (1845). Epacridaceae R. Brown, In: Lehmann, C. (ed.) “Plantae Preissianae.” Vol. 1. pp. 296-336.
184
Nuytsia Vol. 12, No. 2 (1998)
Nuytsia 12(2); 185-1 89(1 998)
185
Xanthosia eichleri, a new species of Apiaceae from Western Australia
J.M. Hart and M.J. Henwood
John Ray Herbarium, School of Biological Sciences, Macleay Building A12,
The University of Sydney, New South Wales 2006, Australia
Abstract
J.M. Hart and M.J. Henwood. Xanthosia eichleri, a new species of Apiaceae from Western Australia.
Nuytsia 12 (2); 185-189 (1998). A new species in the Apiaceae, occurring in south west Western
Australia, is described as Xanthosia eichleri J.M. Hart & M.J. Henwood. A key is provided to Xanthosia
eichleri and its allies.
Introduction
As a result of a revision of Xanthosia and allied genera in the Apiaceae, a previously undescribed
species from south west Western Australia is named Xanthosia eichleri. This species was first collected
by S.W. Jackson at ‘Bow River’ in 1912. The specimen was deposited in the National Herbarium of
NSW where it was placed within Xanthosia tridentata, a morphologically similar species from eastern
Australia. No further collections of the species were made until 1 982 when it was found beside the South
Coast Highway between Denmark and Walpole; all subsequent collections have been made since 1 990.
Xanthosia eichleri is a member of a morphologically distinctive group comprising five of the
twenty species in the genus. The group, here referred to as the X. tridentata group, is characterized by
fruits which are glabrous, smooth to very minutely papillate and are surmounted by slightly raised,
glabrous nectaries. The taxonomic status of this group is currently under investigation. All other
species in the genus have more prominent, hirsute to villous nectaries, fruits which are hirsute at least
on the summit and are never minutely papillate.
Key to the Xanthosia tridentata group
1 Sepals peltate; eastern Australia Xanthosia tridentata
1 ; Sepals not peltate; Western Australia 2
2 Leaves simple 3
2: Leaves ternately compound 4
3 Umbels simple; petals shorter than the sepals; leaves cuneate,
margins often tridentate Xanthosia eichleri
3; Umbels usually compound; petals equal to the sepals; leaves linear,
margins usually entire Xanthosia ciliata
186
Nuytsia Vol. 12, No. 2 (1998)
4 Subshrub to 0.2 m high; umbels simple; peduncles reflexed;
stamens about the same length as perianth; llowers green Xanthosia fruticulosa
4: Shrub to 1.0 m high; umbels compound; peduncles erect;
stamens longer than the perianth; flowers cream Xanthosia bungei
Xanthosia eichlcri J.M. Hart & M.J. Henwood, sp. nov.
Xanthosia sp. Warren {A.R. Annels 1265)
Xanthosiae tridentatae affinis sed folia integra ad tridentata; umbellae simplices cum 2-6 iloribus;
sepala non peltata, longiora petala; fructus 5-7 nervatus.
T’vpMS’.' Gladstone Falls, Deep River, Warren District, Western Australia, 31 October 1990, A.R. Annels
1265 (hob: PERTH 3129217; iso: MJP4553).
Erect, procumbent or decumbent perennial subshrub to 0.25 m high, sparsely hirsute, the stem
becoming flaky when aged. Leaves simple, cauline, pctiolatc; petiole sheathing, c. 0.8 mm long, ciliate;
lamina cuneate, 5-12 mm long, 1-4 mm wide, tridentate or less often entire. Involucral bracts 4 or
5, obovate or lanceolate, foliaceous, green, shorter than flowers, 2. 1-2.6 mm long, 0.9-1.1 mm wide,
apex acute. Inflorescence of simple umbels; umbels 2-6-flowered, leaf-opposed, often borne in pairs,
pedunculate; peduncles 1. 0-3.6 mm long. Ftowr.v pedicellate, mostly bisexual, rarely male. Sepals
5, lanceolate, 1-1.6 mm long, c. 0.5 mm wide, green, glabrous. Peto/s 5, .shorter than sepals, spathulate,
the base clawed, 0.7-0.8 mm long, c. 0.4 mm wide, white or cream, the midrib adaxially keeled and
forming abridge with the in flexed appendix. S/amfnsS.approximately equal to the perianth; filaments
c. 0.5 mm long; anthers dorsally attached, c. 0.2 mm long. Nectaries!, slightly raised, c. 0.3 mm high,
free from the styles, glabrous. Styles 2, upright at male anthesis, spreading at female anthesis, up to
0.5 mm long. Ovary hicarpellate, laterally llattened, glabrous. Male flowers differ from the bisexual
flowers in having an undeveloped inconspicuous ovary, with the styles barely protruding above the
nectaries. Pn<;Y brown, ovoid, 1 .7-1 .9 mm long, 1.3-2 mm wide, c. 0.4 mm deep. Mericarps g\abrous,
minutely papillate, ovate or elliptic in transverse section, 5-7 ribbed, the ribs keeled. (Figure 1)
Selected specimens ( 16 examined). WESTERN AUSTRALIA; Watershed Rd 1 .8 km N of Basin Rd,
20 km NW of Denmark, 34°45 '2 F'S, 1 1 7“08' 1 0"E, 1 9 Nov. 1 99 1 , A.P. Annels 1 977 (PERTH); Corner
of Break & Nornalup roads, 34°49' 1 8"S, 1 1 6“57'52'’E, 28 Nov. 1994, A.P. Annels 5043 (MJP); Private
property 2 km SSW of Mt Lindesay, 34°5r30"S, 1 17°18'00"E, 28 Oct. 1992, B.G. Hammersley 771
(PERTH);DenmarkShire-CenlreBreakroad5.5kmEfrom Denmark- Mount Barkerroad, 34°49'55"S,
1 17°27'50"E, 1 Oct. \ 994, B.G. Hammersley 1 180 (PERTH); Break Rd, 1 km Wof KentRivercrossing,
34°50' I O'S, 1 1 7T)3' 00"E, 22 Oct. 1 994, B. G. Hammersley 1234 (PERTH); Gladstone Falls, Deep River,
34‘’52'50''S, 1 16“35'l r’E,2Feb. 1997,LM. Wart 403 (CANB, PERTH, SYD); Gladstone Falls, Deep
River, 7 Nov. 1 995, J.M. 7/arr95 106 (CANB, MEL, NSW, PERTH, SYD); 2.6 km N of Mitchell River
on Denmark-Mt Barkerroad, 9 Nov. 1995, LM. //art 951 17 (PERTH, SYD); Shannon Rock, 1,2 km
by road NW of Shannon River, South Western Highway, Shannon National Park, 8 Dec, 1997,
M.J. Henwood 49S (SYD): Bow River, Nov. 1912, S. VT. Jackson (NSW); Between Denmark and Walpole
near takeoff lo Parry Beach along South Coast Highway, 35°0rS, 1 I7°()9’E, 9 Dec. 1982,
K.H. Rechingex b0\'3 \ (PERTH).
Distribution. Western Australia: Menzies and Warren Districts: from Shannon National Park east to
Sheepwash Creek National Park and south to the coast. (Figure 2)
J.M. Hart and M.J. Henwood, Xanihosia eichleri, a new species from Western Australia
187
Figure 1 . Xanihosia eichleri. A - branchlet (scale 10 mm); B - a pair of umbels (scale 2.5 mm); C - leaf with sheathing
petiole (scale 3 mm); D - flower, female phase (scale 1 mm); E - fruit, styles shed (scale 1 mm); F, G petals; F - adaxial
view showing inflexion, G - side view (scale 0.4 mm). Drawn from J.M. Hurl 95106 (A-D, F, G) and J.M. Hart
403 (E).
Habitat. Sand, sandy loam or granite outcrops mainly in Jarrah-Marri woodland. Most collections are
from roadsides.
Phenology. Flowering; October to November. Fruiting: December to February.
188
Nuytsia Vol. 12, No. 2 (1998)
Conservation status. 2RC- (Brigg.s & Leigh 1995). Known geographical range restricted to less than
100 km. Three collections have been made within national parks and most collections are from
roadsides. The size ofthe populations within national parks is unknown. The species has no identified
threats and is perhaps more common within its range than ihe current number of collections would
suggest. CALM Conservation Codes for Western Australian Flora: Priority Three.
Etymology. The specific epithet honours the late Dr Hansjoerg Eichler (1916-1992) in recognition
of his contribution to the taxonomy oi Xanthosia and the Australian Apiaceac.
Affinities. Xanthosia eichlcri is distinguished from Xanthosia tridentata by the former’s smaller
leaves (which are not always tridentate), simple umbels, fruits with fewer ribs and non-pcltate sepals.
Xanthosia eichleri is also similar to Xanthosia Jruticulosa but differs from it in having simple rather
than compound leaves. Fruits oi' X. fruticulosa are smooth with Oat ribs, whereas those of X. eichleri
are minutely papillate with keeled ribs. Xanthosia ciliata may be distinguished from X. eichleri by
its linear leaves, which are very rarely notched. Xanthosia ciliata normally has compound umbels,
but tightly contracted, simple umbels may be found on individuals with small, entire, linear leaves
from the Stirling Range.
J.M. Hart and M.J. Henwood, Xanthosia eichleri, a new species from Western Australia
189
Notes. The simple umbels of this species may be misinterpreted as compound umbels, which are more
typical of the genus. The umbels of X. eichleri are commonly in pairs subtended by a single stem-
clasping bract (whereas the number of bracts is equal to the number of rays in all compound umbels
in Xanthosia) and the in volucral bracts surround the flowers in the same manner as in thesimple umbels
of X. fruticulosa.
Xanthosia tridentata is restricted to New South Wales, Victoria and Tasmania and does not occur
in Western Australia as staled in the “Flora of New South Wales” (Brooks & Powell 1992).
Acknowledgements
We thank the directors of NSW, MJP and PERTH for access to specimens. We are grateful to Greg
Keighery for comments on an earlier draft of the manuscript.
References
Briggs, J.D. & Leigh, J.H. (1996). “Rare or Threatened Australian Plants.” 1995 Revised Edition. (CSIRO: Melbourne.)
Brooks, A.K. & Powell, J.M. (1992). Xanthosia. In: Harden, G. (ed.) “Flora of New South Wales.” pp. 94-96. (University
of New South Wales Press: Sydney.)
190
Nuytsia Vol. 12, No. 2 (1998)
Nuytsia 12(2):191-195(1998)
191
Notes on the genus Lepidium (Brassicaceae) in Western Australia,
including recognition of a new species, L. amelum
B.J. Lepschi
Western Australian Herbarium, Department of Conservation and Land Management,
Locked Bag 104, Bentley Delivery Centre, Western Australia 6983
Abstract
B.J. Lepschi. Notes on ihe genus Lepidium (Brassicaceae) in Western Australia, including
recognition of anew species, L. amelum. Nuytsia 12 (2): 191-195(1998). Lepidium amelum'Le.pschi,
a rare taxon from the Pilbara region of Western Australia is described, illustrated and its distribution
mapped. Descriptions and illustrations of the previously unknown fruit and seed of the rare species
L. catapycnon Hewson and L. xylodes Hewson are also presented.
Introduction
Lepidium L. (Brassicaceae) is a widespread genus of some 150 species, represented in Australia by
34 indigenous and eight introduced species (Hewson 1982a, b). Thirty species have been recorded
from Western Australia, three of these introduced, with 1 2 of the indigenous taxa regarded as rare or
threatened (Anon. 1996). This paper presents a description of a rare, new Lepidium from the eastern
Pilbara region, as well as information on the fruits and seeds of two other rare species in the genus.
Materials and methods
This study is based on examination of herbarium collections from AD, BRI, DNA and PERTH.
“Karratha”, cited in the exsiccatae list for L. amelum and L. catapycnon, refers to the Department of
Conservation and Land Management’s regional herbarium situated at Karratha, Western Australia. All
measurements were made from herbarium material (reconstituted where necessary). See the end of this
issue for definitions of conservation codes used in this paper.
New species description
Lepidium amelum Lepschi, sp. nov.
A sp. L. pedicellosae F. Muell. foliorum basi sessili, auriculata differt.
192
Nuytsia Vol. 12, No. 2 (1998)
Typus: 300 in north-west of Bells Pit, Woodie Woodie [mine], Oakover River Catchment, north-east
Pilbara, Western Australia, early August 1996, A.S. Weston 96.8.1 {holo: PERTH 04656148- iso-
CANB,K,MEL,US)
Erect j/rra/? 0.3- 1 m, all parts glabrous, leaves and stems glaucous. Leaves alternate, sessile, broadly
elliptic to subcircular, 7.8-41 mm long, 8-36 mm wide; base auriculate; apex apicuiate; margin entire.
Inflorescence an elongate raceme, inserted terminally on the branches. Sepals 4, narrowly ovate to
elliptic or oblong-elliptic, more or less concave and shallowly hooded distally, 5.26 mm long,
1 .9-2.7 mm wide. Petals 4, proximal c. two-thirds pseudotubular (margins strongly to (rarely) weakly
inrolled, cucullate at the base), distal c. one-third flat and ovate to rounded-triangular, entire petal more
or less rhomboid when Battened out, 6.5-1. 2 mm long, 2.7-3.5 mm wide, white. Stamens 6; filaments
linear, 5.7-6 mm long; anthers elliptic to oblong-elliptic, 1.7-1 .8 mm long. Style 3.2-3. 9 mm long,
markedly exsert in fruit, stigma small, subcapitate. Pedicels spreading in mature fruit; straight to
slightly recurved, 6.5-7.5 mm long. Silicula elliptic to broadly elliptic, 7.7-8.3 mm long, 5.5-6 mm
broad, winged, the wings obtuse to more or less acute, forming a notch c. 1/8-1/10 of the length of the
silicula; gynophore hardly developed. Seed more or less elliptic, 3-3.5 mm long, 1 .7-2.0 mm wide,
red-brown, smooth, strongly mucose; cotyledons incumbent. (Figure lA-C)
Figure l. Lepidiuin ainelum. A - branchiet; B - IVuit; C - seed. L. catapycnon. D - fruit; E - seed. L. xylodes
F - fruit; G - seed. Drawn from Davis 98 (A-C), Sian & Nicholson l.S/10/85-4 (D, E) and Mitchell 811 (F, G).
B.J. Lepschi, Notes on the genus Lepidium in Western Australia
193
Specimens examined. WESTERN AUSTRALIA: [c. 110 km ESE of Nullagine], 20-22 June 1979,
G. DavA 98 (PERTH); c. 12 km SEofSkull Springs on Wandanya Station, 1 Nov. \ 996, K. A. Leighton
PRP 1408 (CANB, NSW, PERTH); 14kmWofTanguinHill,c. 100 km SE of Shay Gap, 15July 1984,
K.R. Newhey 10501 (CANB, MEL, PERTH); 79.7 km from Warrawagine Homestead on a bearing of
154‘’,30June \991,A.L Payne PRP 1613(AD, BRI, CANB, Karratha, PERTH).
Distribution. Restricted to Ihe Oakover River Valley area, just west of Rudall River National Park in
the north-eastern Pilbara region of Western Australia. (Figure 2)
Habitat. Occurs on stony, calcareous, alkaline soils formed from tertiary calcretes of the Oakover
Formation (A. A. Mitchell pers. comm.). Recorded from Triodia wiseana C.A. Gardner hummock
grassland {LeightonPRP 1408, Paywe PRP 1613), low, open Co/^mfcia sp. woodland (Vewfcey 10501),
and with Lepidium pholidogynum F. Muell on the wall of a disused settlement pond on a mine site
{Weston 96.8.1).
Phenology. Flowering and fruiting recorded June-August.
Conservation status. CALM Conservation Code for the Western Australian Flora: Priority One. Known
from a small number of populations in an active mining area.
Etymology. Named from the Greek a - not, without, and melos in reference to the sessile leaves.
Notes. Lepidium amelum is closely related to L. pedicellosum, with which it shares a distinctive petal
morphology. It can be distinguished from this species by its .sessile, amplexicaul leaf bases, and in
being consistently glabrous. Leaves in L. pedicellosum are attenuate with a petiole up to 7 mm long,
Figure 2. Distribution of Lepidium amelum.
194
Nuytsia Vol. 12, No. 2 (1998)
and occasional plants of this species may also be hairy. Lepidium amelum and L pedicellosum are also
allied to L, stronglophyllum F. Muell. ex Benth., from central and eastern Australia.
While L. anielum, L. pedicellosum and L stronglophyllum are similar in their overall morphology,
I have elected to recognize all three as distinct species. No intergradation has been observed on
herbarium material, and no intermediate plants are known in the field. All three taxa also occupy
discrete geographical ranges. Treating L. amelum as a subspecies of L. pedicellosum is not realistic,
as the distinctions between these taxa are of the same magnitude as the differences between
L. pedicellosum and L stronglophyllum. Reducing both L. anielum and L. pedicellosum to subspecies
of L. stronglophyllum would also appear to serve little purpose.
Lepidium pedicellosum has been treated as conspecific with L. stronglophyllum by some authors
in the past (e.g. Mueller 1 883). However, as demonstrated by Carolin & Hewson (1981) and Hewson
(1982a, b), the two species can readily be separated by petal morphology and width. Petals in
L. pedicellosum are identical in morphology to those of L. amelum (see description above), and are
2. 5-3. 6 mm wide, while L. .stronglophyllum has more or less flat (i.e. not pseudotubular) petals (see
Carolin & Hewson 1981, Hewson 1982a, b) which are 1.2-1. 7 mm wide. Note that measurements
presented here arc taken from reconstituted petals Battened out to their full width, and differ slightly
from those cited in earlier publications (it should also be noted that the descriptions of L. pedicellosum
presented by Carolin & Hewson (1981) and Hewson (1982a, b) do not encompass any elements of
L. amelum). As well as differences in petal characters, L. pedicellosum is sometimes hairy, whereas
L. stronglophyllum (and L amelum) are always glabrous.
Lepidium amelum has been referred to as Lepidium sp. Tanguin Hill {K.R. Newbey 1 050 1 ) at PERTH
and by Anon. (1996).
Fruit and seed descriptions
Lepidium catapycnon and L. xylodes are two rare, poorly known taxa from the Eremaean Botanical
Province (cf. Beard 1980) of Western Australia. Fruit and seed of both taxa were unknown at the time
of HewsoiTs ( 1 982a, b) treatments of the genus, but mature fruiting material of both taxa has since
become available, allowing descriptions of the fruits and seeds to be made.
Lepidium catapycnon Hewson
Style 2. 0-2. 5 mm long, markedly exsert in fruit; stigma small, subcapitate. Silicula broadly elliptic
to subcircular, 5. 0-5. 5 mm long, 4. 0-4. 5 mm broad, winged, sparsely papillose, especially on the
wings; wings obtuse to more or less acute, forming a notch c. 1/8 the length of the silicula; gynophore
hardly developed. Seed more or less elliptic 2. 3-2. 6 mm long, 2. 0-2. 5 mm broad, red-brown, smooth,
strongly mucose; cotyledons incumbent. (Figure ID, E)
Specimens e.xutnined. WESTERN AUSTRALIA: Near Wittenoom [precise locality withheld due to
conservation reasons], 15 Oct. 1985, A.N. Start & C.J. Nicholson CJN 15/10/1985-2, A.N. Start &
C.J. Nicholson CJN 1 5/ 1 0/ 1 985-4 (both Karratha, PERTH); Near Newman [precise locality withheld
due to conservation reasons], Jan. 1997, M. Maiers.n. (PERTH).
Conservation status. CALM Conservation Codes for the Western Australian Flora: Declared Rare.
B.J. Lcpschi, Notes on the genus Lepidium in Western Australia
195
Notes. Hewson ( 1 982a) considered L. catapycnon to be related to L. pedicellosum, but L. catapycnon
would appear to have greater affinity with L. platypetalum Hewson, which it superficially resembles.
Lepidium catapycnon and L. platypetalum have distinctive, linear, more or less terete leaves, which
are quite different from the broad, fiat, transversely linear leaves of L. pedicellosum. These taxa also
share pscudotubular, cucullate petals. Lepidium catapycnon and L. platypetalum. may be separated
by indumentum and silicula size.
Lepidium xylodes Hewson
Style 2. 5-3.0 mm long, markedly exsert in fruit; stigma small, subcapitate. Silicula elliptic to ovate,
6. 5-7.0 mm long, 4. 5-5.0 mm broad, winged, sparsely papillose, especially on the wings; wings narrow,
forming a very shallow notch; gynophore developed, to 0.7 mm long. Seed 3. 3-3. 7 mm long,
1.7-2. 5 mm broad, red-brown, smooth, strongly mucose; cotyledons incumbent, tending to become
biplicate. (Figure IF, G)
CAflmniet/. WESTERN AUSTRALIA: Yarlingulla Paddock, Belele Station, 12 Nov. 1980,
A.A. Mitchell (PERTH).
Consen’otion status. CALM Conservation Codes for the Western Australian Flora: Priority One.
Notes. The presence of more or less biplicate cotyledons in L. xylodes suggests a possible relationship
with L. genistoides Hewson, a species of uncertain affinities, which also exhibits similar cotyledon
morphology. Hewson (1982a) suggested L. genistoides may be misplaced in subsect. Monoploca
(of sect. Monoploca (Bunge) PrantI), given the more or less biplicate cotyledons, and could perhaps
be accommodated in subsect. Diploploca Hewson. This also applies to L. xylodes, but until more
fruiting material becomes available, so that this feature can be examined in more detail, both taxa are
best retained in subsect. Monoploca.
Acknowledgements
I am grateful to Ken Leighton, Andrew Mitchell, Alan Payne and Arthur Weston for their efforts
in obtaining material of L. amelurn for me, Margaret Pieroni for the illustrations and Paul Wilson for
checking the Latin diagnosis. The curators of AD, BRI and DNA are thanked for allowing me to examine
collections in their care.
References
Anon. (1996). Declared Rare and Priority Flora List. Unpublished Report, Department of Conservation and Land
Management. Como.
Beard, J.S. (1980). A new phytogeographic map of Western- Australia. Western Australian Herbarium Research Notes
.1: 37-58.
Carolin, R.C. & Hewson, H.J. (1981). Cruciferae. in: Jessop, J.P. (ed.). “Flora of Central Australia.” pp. 94-102.
(Reed: Sydney.)
Hewson, H.J. (1982a). The genus Lepidium L. (Brassicaceae) in Australia. Brununia 4: 217-308.
Hewson, H. J. (1984b). I.epidium. in: George. A.S. (ed.). “Flora of Auslralia." Vol. 8. pp. 256-283. (Australian
Government Publishing Service: Canberra.)
Mueller, F. von (1883). "The Plants Indigenous Around Sharks Bay and its Vicinity." (Government Printer: Perth.)
196
Nuytsia Vol. 12, No. 2 (1998)
Nuytsia 12(2); 1 97-206(1 998)
197
Three new triggerplant species in Stylidium subgenus Centridium
(Styiidiaceae) from Western Australia
Allen Lowric' and Kevin F. Kenneally^
'6 Glenn Place, Duncraig, Western Australia 6023
’Science Publications Unit, Corporate Relations Division, Department of Conservation and
Land Management, Locked Bag 29, Bentley Delivery Centre, Western Australia 6983
Abstract
Lowrie, Allen and Kcnneally, Kevin F. Three new triggerplant species in Stylidium subgenus
Centridium (Styiidiaceae) from Western Australia. Nuytsia 12(2): 197-206 (1998). Three new Western
Australian species, Stylidium aceratum, S. diceratum and S. weeliwolli Lowrie & Kenneally are
described and illustrated. They belong to Stylidium subgenus Centridium (Lindl.) Mildbr., bringing
the total number of species known in this subgenus to ten. A key is provided for taxa.
Introduction
Three new species of triggerplant, belonging in Stylidium subg. Centridium (Lindl.) Mildbr.
(Styiidiaceae) are described here. All members of this subgenus (Mildbraed 1908: 31)haveaglobose
hypanthium, gynostemium mobility produced not by a sensitive hinged torosus but by the sensitive
movement of a cunabulum from the convex set position to the concave triggered position, and a
stipitate brush-like stigma. Haploid chromosome numbers of 1 1 and 13 have been recorded in this
subgenus (Farrell & James 1 979; S.H. James pers. comm.).
Ten species are now recognized in Stylidium subgenus Centridium in northern and western
Australia, as follows:
1 . Kimberley region of Western Australia and far north of Northern Territory. Stylidium ceratophorum
O. Schwarz and S. longicornu Carlquist occur in both these regions while the new species S. diceratum
is restricted to the Kimberley.
2. Ashburton District of the Eremean Botanical Province of Western Australia. The new species
Stylidium weeliwolli is the first record from this region.
3. South-west of Western Australia. Stylidium aceratum (a new species), S. calcaratum R. Br.,
S. ecorne (F. Muell. ex F.H. Erickson & J.H. Willis) P.G, Farrell & S.H. James, S. edentatum Lowrie
& Carlquist, S. mimeticum Lowrie & Carlquist and S. perpusillum Hook. f.
198
Nuytsia Vol. 12, No. 2 (1998)
Taxonomy
Key to the species of Stylidium subgenus Centridiiim
1: Appendage(s) present on gynostemium 2
1 Appendage(s) absent on gynostemium 6
2: Gynostemium with 2 appendages; corolla predominately orange
on adaxial surface S.diceratum
2 Gynostemium with 1 appendage; corolla white or pink on adaxial surface 3
3: Gynostemium bearing a recurved horn-shaped appendage on the bend 4
3 Gynostemium appendage not horn-shaped 5
4: Throat appendages 2; labellum elliptic, apex not emarginate,
irregularly serrate S. calcaratum
4 Throat appendages 4; labellum lageniform, apex emarginate, not serrate S. weeliwolli
5: Gynostemium appendage reniform, recurved from the bend;
nectary spur prominent, cradled by the horizontal posterior sepal S. mimeticum
5 Gynostemium appendage square, recurved from the bend,
apex irregularly serrate; nectary spur absent or very poorly developed
and hidden behind the always vertical posterior sepal S. ecorne
6: Corolla orange; posterior corolla lobes each deeply divided into 2
(so as to appear as 4 individual lobes) S. ceratophorum
6 Corolla white to pink; posterior corolla lobes undivided 7
7; Plants mostly 1. 5-2.5 cm high; nectary spur absent S. perpusillum
7 Plants mostly 4.5-25 cm high; nectary spur present 8
8: Posterior corolla lobes cuneate, the apex obtuse and unlobed, with a
distinctive blunt lateral tooth at the base S.edentatum
8 Posterior corolla lobes either cuneate with a tridentate apex or obovate
with a crenatc apex, lacking basal tooth 9
9; Plants mostly 5-9 cm tall; posterior corolla lobes cuneate, apex tridentate;
nectary spur shorter than the posterior sepal S. aceratum
9 Plants mostly 10-25 cm tall; posterior corolla lobes obovate, apex crenate;
nectary spur longer than the posterior sepal S. longicornu
Stylidium aceratum Lowrie & Kenneally, sp. nov.
Stylidio calcarato R. Br. affinis sed cornu appendicis e flexo gynostemii absent!.
Typus: Great Northern Highway, north of Bullsbrook [precise locality withheld]. Western Australia,
9 November 1991, /t. Lovvne 496 {holo: PERTH 04980336; Ao.' MEL).
A fibrous-rooted annual herb 5-9 cm high (including inflorescence); stem translucent white,
2.5-4 mm long, 0.8-1 mm diam.; basal rosette of leaves flat, 5-12 mm diam. Leaves spathulate,
3-6 mm long, 0.7- 1.5 mm wide near apex, 0.3-0. 6 mm wide at the base, flat in section, glabrous.
Inflorescence usually a simple dichasium but also the beginnings of a compound dichasium in older
plants, 5-9 cm long (including peduncle), glandular. Bracts and hracteoles lanceolate, 1.5-2 mm long,
A. Lowrie & K F, Kcnaeally, Three now SlylUliiiin from WA
199
0,5-0. 6 mm wide, sparsely glandular. Pedicels 10-24 mm long, glandular. Hypanthium globose,
1 .6- 2 mm diam. at anlhesis, glandular. Sepals 5, all free to the base, lanceolate, glandular; anterior
pair horizontal and splayetl outwards under the anterior corolla lobes, 1 .6—2.5 mm long; middle pair
erect, 1 .5—1 .9 mm long; posicrior sepal horizontal, 1 .3— 1 .5 mm long. Corolla dark pink with a white
base on adaxial surface, pale pink on abaxial surface, glabrous, lobes vertically paired; anterior lobes
geniculate, 6-7 mm long, 1 .4- 1 .8 mm wide, apex ± tricrenate; posterior lobes cuneatc, 5.5-7 mm long,
1 .7- 2 mm wide, apex trideiitate. Nectary spur c. 0,8 mm long, cradled by the posterior sepal. Throat
white, bearing 2 smooth mounds, each positioned at the sinus of the anterior and posterior corolla
lobes, with deeply and irregularly laciniate margins between the mounds, and 2 conical appendages
c. 0.5 mm long at the base of the posterior corolla lobes. Labellum positioned below the the sinus of
the anterior corolla lobes, purple with a white base, concave, elliptic, c. 2 mm long, c. 1.8 mm wide;
apex cuspidate, c. 0.5 mm long, with shorter serrate segments either side, sparsely glandular.
Gynostemium c. 3 mm long, the erect non-sensitive basal column c. 1.5 mm long, the sensitive
cunabulum c. 1 .5 mm long, appendage(s) absent from the bend of the gynostemium; anthers yellow,
pollen yellow; stigma stipitate between the anthers, c. 2 mm long, apex brush-like. Capsule globose,
2. 5-2. 7 mm diam. Seeds rusty brown, ± ellipsoid, 0.2-0.25 mm long, 0,1-0.15 diam., rugose.
(Figure I)
Other specimen examined. WESTERN AUSTRALIA: Type location [precise locality withheld], 3 Nov.
1993, K.F. Kenneally 1 1398 (PERTH).
Distribution. Known only from the type location.
Habitat. Grows in sandy soils on swamp hcathland with Stylidium calcaratum, S. mimeticum,
S. utricularioides Benth. and paperbarks [Melaleuca).
Flowering period. October-November.
Chromosome number. S.H. James (pers. comm.) has obtained a chromosome number count of
n = 1 1 for Stylidium aceratum. The voucher specimen for this previously unpublished record is
A. Lowrie 496.
Conservation status. CALM Conservation Codes for Western Australian Flora; Priority Two. The
species is known from only one locality, which is on a nature reserve. Known only from small colonies
numbering 20 to 1 00 plants and scattered individuals over the southern portions of the nature reserve.
A survey to establish the total population size over the entire nature reserve is recommended.
Etymology. The specific epithet aceratum is from the Greek prefix a - lacking and ceras - horn in
reference to the absence of an appendage on the bend of the gynostemium.
Affinities. The nearest relative to Stylidium aceratum is 5’. calcaratum. Both species have geniculate
anterior corolla lobes and tridentate posterior corolla lobes and a chromosome number of n = 11,
S. aceratum differs from S. calcaratum (whose contrasting characters are given in parenthesis) by
having 2 conical throat appendages at (he base of the posterior corolla lobes (2 throat appendages
reniform); nectary spur shorter than the posterior sepal (longer than the posterior sepal); appendage
absent from the bend of the gynostemium (appendage present at the bend of the gynostemium); and
labellum apex cuspidate with shorter serrate segments either side (labellum apex shortly serrate
throughout).
200
Nuytsia Vol. 12, No. 2 (1998)
Figure 1. StyU/liiiin aceralum. A - habit ol' llovvcniig plant; 13 - leaf, enlarged section left; C - hypanthium
and sepals; U - lateral view of corolla, gynosteniiuni and hypanthium; E - corolla; F - throat appendages;
G - labelluin; II - lateral view of gynosteniiuni, anthers and stipitatc stigma in the set-non-triggered position.
Scale bar for all = 1 mm. Drawn from A. Lowrie 496.
A. Lowrie & K.F. Kcnneally, Three new Stylidium from WA
201
Notes. Stylidium aceratum grows near populations of S. calcaratiim as well as S. mirneticum at the
type location. Also populations of S. ecorne have been found about 1 km south of the type location.
Extensive exploration in the area has found no hybrids between these taxa. The latter two species differ
from S. aceratum in chromosome number, both having n= 13(S.H. James pers. comm.), a factor which
may contribute to their reproductive isolation.
Stylidium diceratiini Lowrie & Kcnneally, sp. nov.
Stylidio langicorno Carlquist affinis sed pagina adaxiali corollae pro parte maxima aurantiaca,
appendicibus fauce 4 et cornu-appendicibus 2 supra flexum gynostemii ornata.
Typus: Along sandy creek crossing on road to Beverley Springs [precise locality withheld], Kimberley,
Western Australia, 2 August 1 996, T. Lovw'/e 1526 (holo: PERTH 04980344; Ao.' MEL).
A fibrous-rooted annual herb 15-35 cm high (including inflorescence); stem translucent white,
0.5-3 mm long, 0. 3-0.4 mm diam.; basal rosette of leaves flat, 10-16 mm diam. Leaves lanceolate
(longer ones) or spaihulatc (shorter ones), 5-8 mm long, l-2.5mm wide near the apex, 0.2-0. 6 mm wide
at the base, flat in section, glabrous. Inflorescence variable, l-llowered, 3-flowered simple dichasium,
2-4-flowered raceme (juvenile specimens) or a many-flowered compound dichasium with some of the
upper branches racemose (mature specimens), 6-15 cm long, glandular. Bracts and bracteoles
lanceolate orciliptic, 1 .5-3 mm long, 0.5- 1 .3 mm wide, glandular. Pedicels 15-65 mm long, glandular.
Hypanthium globose, 0.9- 1.4 mm diam. at anthesis, glandular. Sepals 5, al 1 free to the base, lanceolate,
glandular; anterior pair horizontal and splayed outwards under the anterior corolla lobes, 1 .3-2.3 mm
long; middle pair erect, 1 .2-1.7 mm long; posterior sepal horizontal, 1 .5-2 mm long. Corolla cream
on abaxial surface with broad dark pink veins, glabrous, lobes vertically paired; anterior lobes
yellowish orange with dark orange veins on adaxial surface, with 2 short and 2 long yellow radial stripes
from the throat as well as a band of yellow around the glandular inside margins of the lobes, cuneate-
falcate, 3.5-4 .5 mm long, 2-3 mm wide, apex emarginate; posterior lobes blushed salmon pink over
yellowish orange on adaxial surface and bearing reddish marks at the base with outward radiating
lines, obovate, 2. 5-4. 5 mm long, 1.7-2. 3 mm wide, apex irregularly crenate. Nectary spur cream,
4. 5-6. 5 mm long, cradled by posterior sepal. Throat yellow, bearing 4 (2 pairs) of appendages at base
of posterior corolla lobes; appendages narrowly ovate, acute, the upper pair c. 1 .3 mm long, the others
c. 0.8 mm long. Labelliim positioned below the the sinus oftheanteriorcorolla lobes, green, concave,
obovate, c. 1 .5 mm long, c. I mm wide, apex irregularly serrate, glabrous. Gynostemium c. 2.2 mm
long, the erect non-sensitive basal column c. 0.8 mm long, the sensitive cunabulum c. 1 .3 mm long,
with 2 lateral incurved horn-like appendages on the bend of the gynostemium; stigma stipitate between
the anthers, c. 1 mm long, apex brush-like. Capsule globose, 2.5-3 mm diam. Seeds rusty brown,
± compressed-ovoid, 0. 2-0.3 mm long, 0.1-0.15 diam., longitudinally finely ribbed. (Figure 2)
Other specimen examined. WESTERN AUSTRALIA: Type location [precise locality withheld], Aug.
1993, M.D. Barrett 235 (PERTH).
Distribution. Known only from the type location.
Habitat. Grows in sandy soils on the margins of creek with S’fy/irfiMm cerarop/iorum, S. rubriscapum
W.V. Fitzg.. Drosera caduca. D. paradoxa, Byblis Urdflora and Grevillea pteridifolia.
202
Niiylsia Vol. 12, No. 2 (1998)
l•iglM■c 2. Slylitliuin diccnumn. A - liabil of llowcring plant; B leaf, enlarged section left; C - hypanihium
and sepaLs; I) - corolla; h - lalielluni; B - from view of gynosteniiiim, anthers and slipitale stigma in the triggered
po,sition; G - lateral view ol gynosteniiimi, anthers and stipilate stigma in the triggered position. Seale bar for
all = 1 mtn Drawn Irotii M il Btinrll 2.15 & A. Lowrie 1526.
A. Lowrie & K.l'- Kenncally. Three new Stylidium from WA
203
Flowering period. June-August.
Conservation status. CALM Conservation Codes for Western Australian Flora: Priority One.
Stylidium diceratum is only known from the type locality but as the region is poorly botanically
explored, it is possible that it exists over a much larger area.
Etymology. The specific epithet diceratum from the Greek prefix r/t- twoandeeras - horn in reference
to the two appendages on the bend of the gynostemium.
Affinities. The nearest relative to Stylidium diceratum is S. longicornu. S. diceratum is easily
distinguished from S. longicornu by its orange corolla, 2 horn-like appendages on the bend of the
gynostemium and nectary spur c. 3 times longer than the posterior sepal.
Stylidium diceratum may be confused with S. ceratophoruni because both species have an orange
corolla, and they coexist at the S. diceratum type location. S. ceratophorum is distinguished from
S. diceratum by havinga corolla twice as large, with the posterior lobes each deeply divided to appear
as 4 individual lobes and the anterior lobes ovate-falcate. It also differs in corolla orientation so that
the gynostemium operates from above rather than from below.
Stylidium wecliwolli Lowrie & Kenneally, .v/x now
Stylidio culcarato R. Br. affinis sed corolla appendicibus fauce 4 et lobis anterioribus valde
cruciformibus ornata differt.
Typus: Weeli Wolli Creek, c. 90 km north-west of Newman, Western Australia, 22° 54' S, 1 19° I3'E,
28 August 1991, D.£. Miirfet 1097 [holo: PERTH 04980328; iso: MEL).
A fibrous-rooted annual herb 10-25 cm high (including intJorescence); stem white,
1-4 mm long, 0. 5-0. 7 mm diam.; basal rosettcof leaves flat, 10-50(mostly 17-25) mm diam. Leaves
spathulate or lanceolate. 6.5-27 (mostly 1 1-13) mm long, 3-4.5 (mostly 3-3.5) mm wide near apex,
0.3-1 (mostly 0.7-0. 8) mm wide at the base, flat in section, glabrous, apex obtu.se or acute.
Inflorescence an open much branched compound dichasium, 10-25 cm long (including peduncle),
glandular. Bracts and hracteoles obovate-elliptic, 2.2^.5 mm long, 1 .4-2.2 mm wide, apex acute,
sparsely glandular. Pcf/mc/.v 10-20 mm long, glandular. Hypunthium globose, 1 .2-1 .7 mm diam. at
anthesis, glandular. Sepals 5, all free to the base, lanceolate, glandular; anterior pair horizontal and
splayed outwards under the anterior corolla lobes, 2-2.5 mm long; middle pair erect, 2-2.5 mm long;
posterior sepal horizontal, 1 .8-2.5 mm long. Corolla dark pink on adaxial surface with reddish marks
at the base, ghibrous, lobes vertically paired; anterior lobes geniculate, always distinctly cruciform,
7. 5-8. 5 mm long, 1.8-2 mm wide, apex cmarginate; posterior lobes cuneate, 5.5-6 mm long,
3-3.5 mm wide, ajiex ± tricrcnatc. Nectary spur 2-2.5 mm long, cradled by posterior sepal. Throat
bearing 4 rod-shaped appendages, 2 at the base of anterior corolla lobes and 2 at the base of posterior
corolla lobes; anterior appendages fused along their length, c. 1 .5 mm long; posterior appendages free
to ba.se. c. 1 .7 mm long. Lahelliini positioned below the sinus of the anterior corolla lobes, concave,
lageniform, c. 1 .7 mm long, c. 0.8 mm wide, apex emarginate, glabrous. Gynostemium c. 3.2 mm long,
the erect non -sensitive basal column c. 1 .5 mm long, the sensitive cunabulum c. 1 .7 mm long, with
a horn-like appendage t: 0.2 mm long on the bend of the gynostemium; anthers dark yellow; stigma
stipitale between the anthers, c. 1 .5 mm long, apex brush-like. Capsule globose, 2-3 mm diam. Seeds
dark brown, ± ellipsoid, 0.25-0.3 mm long, 0. 15-0.2 diam., rugose. (Figure 3)
204
Nuytsia Vol. 12, No. 2 (1998)
Figure 3. Stylidium wndiwoUi. A - habit of llowcring plant; B - leaf, enlarged section left; C - hypanthium
and sepals; D - corolla; K - labelluin; F ^ lateral view of gynosteiniuni, anthers and stipitate stigma in the triggered
position; G - lateral view of gynostcniiuin, anthers and stipitate stigma in the set-non-triggered position;
H - front view of horn-like appendage on the bend of the gynostemium. Scale bar for all = I mm. Drawn from
D.E. Miirfel 1097.
A. Lowric & K.K Kenneally, Three new StyUdium from WA
205
Other specimens examined. WESTERN AUSTRALIA: Base of Mt Augustus, Aug. 1997, K. Coate
s.n. (PERTH); Weeli Wolli Springs, 22“ 45' S, 1 19° 15' E, 22 Mar. 1994, £. Holland 4200 & N. Casson
(PERTH);WceliWolli Creek, near springs, 8 Sep. 1992,A/.£'. Trudgen 1 1489 (PERTH); Barlee Range
Nature Reserve, 15.2 km WSW of Jarrabucluundy Bore, 18.3 km N of Mt Palgrave, 18.9 km SW of
Wongajerra Well, 23° 12' 35" S, 1 15° 59' 24" E, 6 July 1995, 5. van Leeuwen 1864 (KARRATHA,
PERTH); Barlee Range Nature Reserve, 1 6 km WSW of Jarrabuduundy Bore, 17.2 km N of Mt Palgrave,
20.2 km SW of Wongajerra Well, 23° 13' 08" S, 1 15° 58' 44" E, 6 July 1995, S. van Leeuwen 1873
(KARRATHA, PERTH).
Distribution. Known from the type location c. 90 km north-west of Newman, c. 350 km west of the
type locality in the Barlee Ranges and c. 270 km south-west of the type locality at Mt Augustus.
Habitat. Gro ws i n gritty sandy soi I tilong the edge of watercourse (D.E. Murfet 1 097); in wet root mass
of Melaleuca leucadendra at edge of permanent pool and in similar but drier ground in sandy clay
amongst root fibres with Eleocliaris geniculata, Lobelia sp., Fimbristylis sp. and Stemodia grossa
(M.E. Trudgen 1 1489); alongside pool at base of gorge, in gritty brown clay loam with lots of silt and
organic material (5. van Leeuwin 1864); in damp red brown soil, gritty silty soil, low in landscape,
herbfield around edge of pool (5. van Leeuwin 1873); and with Drosera indica, Edney’s Walk, Mt
Augustus (photos seen by authors, vouchers not collected, pers, comm. J. Thompson 1998).
Flowering period. August-September.
Consen’ation status. CALM Conservation Codes for Western Australian Flora: Priority Two.
StyUdium weeliwolli is locally abundant at its known locations and currently not under threat.
Etymology. The specific epithet, weeliwolli is from the Australian Aboriginal words meaning “we
arc water running” or simply “running water”. The type location along Weeli Wolli Creek falls within
the region used by the linguistic group known as the Nyiyaparli (sometimes incorrectly speltNiapaili).
This nomcnclatural information was provided by Gordon Ulinc, a senior law person in this language
group and communicated to us by Dr Stephen van Leeuwin, CALM, Karratha.
Affinities. The nearest relative to StyUdium weeliwolli is the south-western species S. calcaratum.
S. weeliwolli differs from S. calcaratum (whose contrasting characters are given in parentheses) by
having 4 rod-shaped throat appendages, 2 fused along their length and 2 subulate and free to base
(throat appendages 2, reniform); anterior corolla lobes distinctly cruciform (anterior corolla lobes
meeting at apex but only slightly crossed over each other); posterior corolla lobes apex ± tricrenate
(apex tridentate); and labellum lageniform, apex emarginate (labellum elliptic, apex irregularly
seiTate).
Notes. StyUdium weeliwolli has been recorded as a perennial plant (A/.f. Trutlgen 1 1489), but this
is doubtful as all other laxa in Stylidiaceae subg. Centridium are annuals.
Acknowledgements
We would like to thank Denzel Murfet and Malcolm Trudgen for their collections and their personal
communications regarding field observations of StyUdium weeliwolli; Dr Stephen van Leeuwin for
his collections, personal communications and information gathered for the meaning of Weeli Wolli;
206
Nuytsia Vol. 12, No. 2 (1998)
Gordon Uline for providing the interpretation of the place name Weeli Wolli; John Thompson for his
photographs and data on S. weeliwolli at Mt Augustus; Gordon Graham for his companionship on
expeditions to the Kimberley; MaKhew and Russell Barrett for their collection and field observations
of 5. diceratum; the leaders and members of the 1 996 Landscape Expedition to the Kimberley; Dr Sid
James for the chromosome counts; Paul Wilson for his assistance with the Latin diagnoses; Dr Barbara
Rye for her comments, and the staff of the Western Australian Herbarium.
References
Farrell, P.G. & James, S.H. (1979). Stylidiiim econie (F. Muell. ex Erickson and Willis) comb, et stat. nov. (Stylidiaceae).
Au.stnilian Journal of Botany 27: 39-45.
Mildbraed, J. (1908). .Stylidiaceae. In: Engler, A. (ed.) “Das Pflanzenreich.” Vol. IV, 278 (35). pp. 1-98 (Engelmann:
Leipzig.)
Nuytsia 1 2(2):207-228( 1 998)
207
A taxonomic revision of Dicrastylis sect. Dicrastylis
(Lamiaceae subfamily Chloanthoideae)
B.L. Rye and M.E. Trudgen
Western Australian Herbarium, Department of Conservation and Land Management,
Locked Bag 104, Bentley Delivery Centre, Western Australia 6983
Abstract
Rye, B.L. & M.E. Trudgen. A taxonomic revision of Dicrastylis sect. Dicrastylis (Lamiaceae
subfamily Chloanthoideae). Nuytsia 12(2); 207-228(1998). The south-western Australian plant
group Dicrastylis Drumm. ex Harv. sect. Dtcraj/y/A (Lamiaceae subfamily Chloanthoideae) is revised.
A key and distribution maps are given for the 1 1 taxa currently recognized in the section, of which nine
have been formally named as species and two are known only by phrase names. Dicrastylis morrisonii
Munir is reduced to a synonym of D. incana Munir. Two new species, Dicrastylis maritima Rye &
Trudgen and D. soliparma Rye & Trudgen, are described and illustrated. Dicrastylis maritima is
noteworthy in growing on the strand and coastal dunes. About half of the taxa appear to be rare and
have been included on the Western Australian Priority Elora List.
Introduction
This paper presents a taxonomic revision ol' Dicrastylis sect. Dicrastylis. Dicrastylis is treated here
as belonging to Lamiaceae subfamily Chloanthoideae rather than to family Chloanthaceae as in a
previous paper (Rye 1996). Recent studies of anatomical and morphological characters (Cantino
et al. 1992) and DNA studies (Qlmstead etal. in press) have indicated that the Chloanthaceae should
not be treated as a separate family but combined with the Prostanthereae to form a subfamily of the
Lamiaceae.
Dicrastylis sect. Dicrastylis is endemic to the south-west of Western Australia. Prior to 1978 only
two species belonging to this section had been described. Live additional species were described by
Munir (1978, 1991), who also defined the boundaries of the .section. Two further members of sect.
Dicrastylis were recognized during a flora survey of the .Shark Bay area (Trudgen & Keighcry 1995)
and were given Ihe phrase names Dicrastylis sp. Shark Bay (J.J. Alford 1 .5 1 8) and Dicrastylis sp. Peron
Peninsul.'i [M.E. Trudgen 7373). d'hc former species is especially interesting as it is adapted to a harsh
maritimeenvironment, growing on the strand and foredunes, a significant extension of the habitat range
for the genus.
208
Nuytsia Vol. 12, No. 2 (1998)
Recently two more taxa that appear to be new species have been distinguished among the
Dicrastylis herbarium specimens at PERTH. These have been allocated phrase names and placed on
the Western Australian Priority Flora List. Dicrastylis sp. Cue {A. A. Mitchell 764) is known only from
immature material and Dicrastylis sp. Denham (M. Lewis 42/92) from a single specimen. More
collections are needed urgently to determine the taxonomic and conservation status of these poorly
known taxa, as they may be endangered.
Methods
Except where otherwise indicated, all specimens cited are housed at PERTH, although duplicates
may exist in other herbaria. All measurements were taken from dry pressed material. Leaf measurements
were obtained from the larger leaves on each specimen. Flower length was taken only from well pressed
flowers and did not include the stamens and style. Measurements of the corolla lobes for each species
were taken from 5-merous llowers. Anthers were measured at the onset of dehiscence.
Indumentum length was taken as the distance the hairs protrude vertically above the surface to
which they are attached. The width of dendritic hairs can be considerably greater than their length
especially if they have only a very short stalk and a much larger branched portion that is horizontal.
Distribution maps were plotted such that each symbol indicates the recorded occurrence of a taxon
in a 0.25 degree latitude by 0.25 degree longitude area. The conservation codes given in this paper
are those used by the Western Australian Department of Conservation and Land Management. An
explanation of these codes is given at the end of this Nuytsia issue.
Taxonomy
Dicrastylis Drumm. ex Harv. sect. Dicrastylis
Type: Dicrastylis fulva Drumm. ex Harv.
Pityrodia sect. Xenotheca F. Muell. (Mueller 1859: 236). Type: Dicrastylis myriantha F. Muell.
[= Dicrastylis fulva Drumm. ex Harv.].
Shrubs with a dense indumentum of branched (usually dendritic) hairs on the stems, on the lower
surface of leaves and bracts and on the inflorescences. Leaves opposite and decussate or rarely in whorls
of three; petiole short or absent. Cymes arranged in fairly lax corymbose panicles, usually obvious but
sometimes hidden by the indumentum and appearing to be condensed into heads, with decussate
branches each subtended by a leaf or bract, the uppermost bracts sessile, the basal peduncle usually
much shorter than the main lateral branches of the panicle; upper bracts glabrous to sparsely hairy inside
or hairy only near apex. Flowers 4-6-merous. Pedicels with a dense white indumentum of dendritic
hairs. Calyx densely dendritic-hairy outside, glabrous inside or rarely with a few hairs towards apex;
lobes slightly shorter than to much longer than tube. Cora//a white, the indumentum also white, usually
unequally 5-lobed, the abaxial lobe largest and the two adaxial lobes shortest, with long simple hairs
inside concentrated at throat but glabrous or largely glabrous elsewhere, with usually appressed
dendritic hairs and scattered sessile glands on outside of lobes and extending at least a short distance
B.L. Rye & M.E. Trudgen, A taxonomic revision of Dicrastylis sect. Dicrastylis
209
below the base of each lobe but glabrous at base of tube; lobes about as long as or longer than tube,
entire (notcrcnate). Stamen.? exsertcd but often exceeded in length by the largest corolla lobe, glabrous
or with a few simple hairs on the base of the filament; filament inserted shortly below summit of floral
tube, white; anther with sessile glands on the abaxial surface near the junction of the two cells. Style
exserted, deeply 2-branched, with large white dendritic hairs densely arranged on the basal part and
often extending onto the style branches (but usually with only a few scattered hairs towards the base
of each branch). Fruit globular to broadly obovoid, usually with scattered sessile glands at least on
summit, largely covered by a dense white indumentum; gynophore short, glabrous, often multi-ribbed.
Distribution and habitat. The section consists of at least 9 species, occurring in sandy habitats in the
south-west of Western Australia. It is absent from the extreme south-west but widespread in the
remainder of the South West Botanical Province, with a concentration of species in the northern part
of the province and the adjacent part of the Eremean Botanical Province, and with one of the southern
species extending into the South-western Interzone. These botanical regions are defined in Beard
(1980). The distributions of all members of section Dicrastylis are shown in Figures 1 and 2.
Phenology. There are no significant differences in flowering times between members of section
Dicrastylis, with all species flowering predominantly in the last three months of the year. As in many
other plant groups in south-western Australia, those species with the more northern distributions tend
to commence and complete flowering earlier than those with more southern distributions. Fruiting
quickly follows flowering but seed set is poor. Although each ovary contains 4 ovules, most fruits
contain only aborted seeds or undeveloped ovules. A few of the fruits examined had a single mature
seed but none had more than one mature seed.
Notes. The main morphological characters distinguishing sect. Dicrastylis from other sections of the
genus are the relatively lax corymbose panicles and the long corolla lobes in relation to the length of
the corolla tube. These features are well illustrated in Figures 6-13 of Munir’s (1978) revision, with
the contrasting features of the other sections illustrated in Figures 1-5 & 14-31. Other sections of
Dicrastylis have cymes condensed into head-like or spike-like clusters and either have corolla lobes
all distinctly shorter than the corolla tube or (in the South Australian species D. verticillataJ.M.Bl&ck)
highly zygomorphic flowers with an exceptionally large abaxial corolla lobe. In sect. Dicrastylis, the
abaxial corolla lobe varies from being distinctly larger than the other lobes to almost the same size,
this feature tending to vary more within species than between species.
Indumentum characters, particularly the type and size of the hairs on various parts of the plant, are
very important in distinguishing the species. Five distinct types of branched hairs are recognized here,
as illustrated in Figure 3. Two of these (A, C) are clearly dendritic and two (D, E) are modified from
the dendritic form to appear more scale-like. The last type of hair (B) is very distinctive, having a single
sub-basal whorl of branches, and is possibly a modified stellate hair with a long central ray. All of these
branched hairs have a patent stalk, but some of the more .scale-like hairs have a very reduced stalk and
the branched upper portion appressed to the stem. For simplicity, dendritic hairs that have the upper
part borne perpendicular to the stem are referred to here as ‘patent’ , those with the upper part horizontal
but borne on a definite short stalk as ‘peltate-dendritic’ and those largely horizontal with an extremely
short stalk as ‘subsessile scale-like’.
Other important characters for distinguishing the taxa are leaf shape and size, flower length and
anther length.
210
Nuytsia Vol. 12, No. 2 (1998)
Figure 1. Geographical distributions, A - Dicrastylis archeri H , northern variant of D. soliparma ▼ and
typical vanant of D. soliparma V ; B - /D. Jiilva • and D. obovata V-
B.L. Rye & M.E. Trudgen, A taxonomic revision of Dicrastylis sect. Dicrastylis
21 1
Figure 2. Geographical distributions. A - Dicrastylis incana V and D. maritUm • ; B - D. linearifolia O and
D. sp. Denham ■ : C - O. micranlha ▼. D. parvifolia O and D. sp. Cue ■ .
212
Nuytsia Vol. 12, No. 2 (1998)
Figure 3. Stem hair types. A-C. Fatcnt branched hairs, from side view. A - glandular dendritic hair of DUrastylis mcana\
B - glandular hair of D. niicmntha with sub-basal whorl of non-glandular branches; C - non-glandular dendritic hair
of D. fulva. D.E. Non-glandular modified dendritic hairs with the branched portion horizontal, from top and side view.
D - peltate-dendritic hair of D. s(>lipiinna\ E - subsessile scale-like hair of D. obovalu. Drawn from C.l. Stacey 564
(A), E.M. liennett 1477 (B), M.£. Phillips 27723 (C), C.A. Gardner Nov. 1933 (D) and G.F. Craig 2910 (E).
Key to species
1. Pedicel and calyx with an appressed indumentum of subsessile scale-like
hairs (Figure 3E) less than 0.2 mm long
2. Leaves obovate or broadly obovate, 6-16x3-10 mm; upper surface fairly
uniformly hairy. Anthers 0.4-0.5 mm long. Occurs east of Hyden.
(Frank Flann National Park area.) D. obovata
2. Leaves almost linear to narrowly obovate, 13-45 x 1-6 mm; upper surface
glabrous throughout or with the bullae becoming glabrous. Anthers usually
0.6-0. 7 mm long. Occurs either north of Geraldton or east of Esperance
3. Upper leaf surface shallowly bullalc, hairy between the bullae.
Stamens usually 5; filament 2.5-3. 7 mm long. (Meadow Station to Binnu
to Mount Magnet) D. linearifolia
3. Upper leaf surface prominently reticulate-patterned, glabrous.
Stamens usually 4; filament c. 1 .5 mm long. (Mt Heywood area) D. archeri
1. Pedicel with patent dendritic hairs 0.2-3. 5 mm long; calyx with either patent
dendritic (Figure 3C) or peltate-dendritic (Figure 3D) hairs 0.2-3 mm long
4. Stem indumentum including glandular hairs (the glands sometimes lost
with age); largest hairs up to 3.5 mm long, if less than 2 mm long then
with a sub-basal whorl of simple branches. Leaves sessile
5. Largest hairs 2-3.5 mm long, dendritic, with several of the branches
terminated by a gland (Figure 3A). Calyx lobes 1.2-2. 3 mm long,
with hairs 0.8-3 mm long. (Chapman River to Greenough River) D. incana
5. Largest hairs 0.5-1 .3 mm long, with a sub-basal whorl of simple
non-glandular hranches and with ti single terminal gland (Figure 3B).
Calyx lobes 1-1.5 mm long, with hairs 0.2-0.35 mm long.
(U.seless Loop to Kulbarri National Park) D. micrantha
4. Stem indumentum of non-glandular hairs; largest hairs up to 1.5 mm long,
dendritic. Leaves usually subsessile or shortly petiolate
B.L. Rye & M.E. Trudgen, A taxonomic revision of Dicmstylis sect. Dicrastylis
213
6. Calyx with hairs 0.2-0. 4 mm long
7. Corolla lobes with a dense indumentum reaching the margin.
Anthers 0.4-0. 6 mm long, pale yellowish to medium brown.
Occurs on the coast on strand, dunes and limestone.
(Dorre Island to Salutation Island)
7. Corolla lobes with a distinct glabrous border. Anthers 0.25-0.35 mm
long, purple to black. Occurs either well inland or in hummock
grassland close to, but not on, the coast
8. Leaves 5-20 x 1-3. 5(5) mm. Panicles 15-75 mm across. (Wubin area
to Oldfield River to Queen Victoria Springs)
8. Leaves (as far as known) 20-30 X 8-10 mm. Panicles c. 130 mm across.
(Peron Peninsula)
6. Calyx with hairs 0.5-1 .5 mm long
9. Leaves mostly narrowly ovate, the larger ones 35-40 mm long;
undersurface prominently reticulate, with minute hairs not covering
the large lacunae. Flowers c. 3 mm long. (Cue area)
9. Leaves varying from narrowly to broadly ovale or obovate, the larger
ones 10-33(37) mm long, if more than 33 mm long then narrowly
obovate; undersurface with small lacunae and/or with large hairs
obscuring lacunae. Flowers 4-6 mm long
10. Stem indumentum (not including inflorescence branches) of patent
dendritic hairs 0.4- 1.4 mm long (Figure 3C). Leaves mostly narrowly
to broadly ovate, 5-14 mm wide. (Mainly Kalbarri to Agnew)
10. Stem indumentum (not including inflorescence branches) of
peltate-dendritic hairs up to 0.3 mm long (Figure 3D). Leaves
mostly narrowly obovate or obovate, 3-9 mm wide.
(Peron Peninsula to Jibberding Station)
D. maritima
. D. parvifolia
D. sp. Denham
D. sp. Cue
D. fulva
D. soliparma
Dicrastylis archeri Munir (Munir 1991: 86-89). Type: North of Mt Heywood [precise locality
withheld]. Western Australia, 1 December 1 990, W.R. Archer 1 12907 (holo: AD u.v., illustration seen;
iso: PERTH 02504847).
Illustration. The holotype is illustrated in Munir (1991: Figure 1).
Shrubs l).4-\ m high, with a dense appressed indumentum on the young stems and inflorescences;
indumentum of subsessile scale-like hairs. Young stems pale to medium grey at first, becoming dark
grey, with white and ferruginous hairs up to 0. 1 mm long. Leave^opposite, an trorse, subsessile or shortly
petiolate. Petioles up to 1.5 mm long. Leaf blades narrowly or very narrowly obovate, 13-26 x
1 .3-3.3 mm, acute or sometimes obtuse, with prominently recurved margins; lower surface pale green
to whitish, closely covered by a dense short while indumentum; upper surface glabrous, medium green,
prominently reticulate-patterned. Panicles 15^0 x 2(1-50 mm, many- flowered, with a dense
appressed indumentum of rather scale-like white hairs on the axes, bracts, pedicels and calyx, often
also with ferruginous hairs; basal peduncle up to 10 mm long. Bracts subtending upper branches
usually narrowly oblong-elliptic, the larger ones 2-3 mm long. Pe^/^■ce/^ upto4mm long; indumentum
c. 0. 1 mm long. Flowers 4- or 5-merous or heteromerous (with 5 calyx lobes, 4 or 5 corolla lobes and
4 stamens), c. 3 mm long. Ctr/y.r with hairs c. 0.1 mm long; tube c. 0.5 mm long; lobes ovate or narrowly
214
Nuytsiu Vol. 12, No. 2 (1998)
ovate, c. 1 .4 mm long, usually narrowly ohiuse. Corolla-, tube c. 1 .4 mm long, the outside sparsely
dendritic-hairy above the middle, with the indumentum becoming densertowards summit; lobes ovate
or broadly ovate, the largest lobe c. 2 mm long and the others slightly shorter, obtuse, with a distinct
glabrous border around the margin outside. Stamens: filament c. 1 .5 mm long; anther c. 0.6 mm long,
pale-coloured. Style with pellale-dcndritic hairs c. 0.3 mm long; entire portion c. 1 .4 mm long; branches
commonly 2-2.5 mm long. Fruit c. I.6x 1 .4 mm but not seen at maturity, fairly uniformly hairy. Seed
not seen.
Other specimen examined. WESTERN AUSTRALIA; NW of Mt Ney Rd [precise locality withheld),
21 May 1993, G.F. Craig & B. Haherley 211 S.
Distribution. Occurs in the south-east of the South West Botanical Province, known from a small area
near Mt Hey wood (east of Grass Patch).
Habitat. Recorded in white sand in open mallee woodland.
Phenology. Flowers and fruits: November to December.
Conservation status. CALM Conservation Codes for Western Australian Flora; Priority One. This
species is known only from two collections, probably both made from the same population.
Notes. The extent of morphological variation in this species is scarcely known, as only one of the two
available specimens is in (lower and there are no mature fruits. The single llowering specimen has more
4-mcrous flowers than 5-merous ones, and also many heteromerous flowers with 5 calyx lobes and
4 stamens. In all other members of sect. Dicrastylis, most of the flowers are 5-merous.
Dicrastylis fulva J.R. Drumm. ex Harv. (Harvey 1855; 56). Type: Northern districts, [Western
Australia], y. DrummondcoU.b, s.n. {lecto: TCD, fide Munir ( 1 978: 479); isolecto: MEL 40849, 4085 1 ,
40854, 40856, 40857, 41230).
Pityrodia myriantha F. Mucll. (Mueller: 1859: 236, 244). Type: Murchison River, [Western Australia, [
A. Oldfield (ho lo: MEL 40855).
Illustration. Munir ( 1 978: Figure 1 I ).
Shruhs().?>- \ .2( 1 . 6) m high, with a dense indumentum on the young stems, leaves and inflore.scences,
the young shoots pale to medium ferruginous. Young stems pale to dark ferruginous, with patent
dendritic hairs, the larger ones 0.4-1 .5 mm long. Leaves opposite or very rarely in whorls of three,
widely spreading, often somewhat retrorse, subsessile or shortly petiolate, densely hairy at first.
Petioles up to 1 .5 mm long. Leaf blades usually ovate to elliptic or broadly so, sometimes narrowly
ovate or narrowly obovale to obovale but the uppermost leaves subtending the main branches of the
panicle always more oi less ovale, (12)1 4-33 x (5 )6- 1 4 mm, narrowly to broadly obtuse, with recurved
margins, medium grey-green or somewhat ferruginous at first, becoming dark green on both surfaces
or somewhat paler on lower surface; lower surface becoming sparsely hairy with age and the .sessile
glands within the pits then becoming visible; upper surface moderately deeply to deeply bullate, with
hairs 0.3-1 .2 mm long. Panicles ( 1 5)30-1 60 x (25)70-1 90 mm, with pink or ferruginous hairs as well
as white hairs on the axes, bracts and calyx lobes; basal peduncle up to 60 mm long, /fracti' subtending
upper branches ovate, the larger ones 4-7.5 mm long. Pedicels up to 6.5 mm long; indumentum
B.L. Rye & M B. Trudgen, A taxonomic revision of Dicrastylis sect. Diemstylis
215
0. 4-1.1 mm long. Flowers mo.stly 5-mcrous, with occa.sional 6-merous llowcrs sometimes present,
5-6 mm long. Culy.x with while and coloured (pink or ferruginous) hairs 0.7-1. 5 mm long; tube
0.4-1 mm long; lobes ovale or narrowly ovate, 0.8-1. 5 mm long, usually narrowly obtuse or aeute.
Corolla: lube 1 .3-2.0 mm long, the outside glabrous or subglabrous on the ribs but hairy at base of
each corolla lobe, the hairs usually becoming denser towards summit; lobes ohovate-oblong or broadly
so, the largest lobe 1 .5-4.3 mm long and the others 1 .3-3.5 mm long, broadly obtuse, with a distinct
glabroLis border around the margin outside. Stamens: filament I 6-3.5 mm long; anther 0.4-0.6 mm
long, dark purplish black. Style with patent dendritic hairs 0.4-0. 9 mm long; entire portion
1 .0-2. 1 mm long; branches 1 .5-2.5 mm long. Fruit possibly not fully mature, the largest seen c. 1 .8
X 1 .3 mm, with the largest hairs towards the summit. Seed not seen. (Figures 3C, 4A-C)
Figure 4. A-C'. Dicni.stylh fulvu. A - leal (x2); B — leal hair (x20); C - corolla (x8). D— 1. Dicrastylis solipanna.
D - flowci 'iig branch (x I ); It - .stem hair (xSO); I- - leaf (x2); G - Hower (x8); tl - corolla (x8); I - fruit (xl2). Drawn
from G.E. lirockway Oct. 1947 (.‘\-C). A’.,/. Cninfieict & F. Spencer 8378 (D.fi.G.H) and /•'. Lulljilz 3165 (F,l).
216
Nuytsia Vol. 12, No. 2 (1998)
Selected specimens examined. WESTERN AUSTRALIA; Near Youanmi, Oct. 1931, G.E. Brockway
33; 28 miles [45 km] Nof Ajana, Oct, 1947, G.E. Brockway, 1 0 miles [ 1 6 km] along Mullewa-Morawa
road, 6 Oct. 1984, A. C. fiurnj 3; Mount Magnet, 2 Oct. 1959, W.H. Butler, 158.3 km WSW of Yalgoo
towards Mullewa, 3 1 Aug. 1976, R. Coven)' 794 1 cfe Mctj/m; Northampton, Nov. 1901, Diels&
Pritzel, 2 1 .6 km N of Northampton Post Office on North West Coastal Highway, 2 Oct. 1 988, / M. Fox
88/107;EofCasuarinasRd,EofGeraldton,24 Oct. 1 992, E.A. 7528; Dirk Hartog Island, Mamn
32 (MEL); State Farm, Chapman River, 1 Nov. 1903, A. Morrison; East Yuna Reserve, Oct. 1976,
B.G. Muir 344; 58 km W of Yalgoo, 8 Oct. 1 989, B. Nordenstam & A. Anderberg 438; 4 miles [6 km]
inland from Kalbarri, 18Scp. 1968, A/.C. P/u7/i>^;c. 8 km W of Mullewa, 5 Oct. 1969,D.y.£. Whibley
3126.
Distribution. Extends from Eurardy Station and Kalbarri National Park in the north of the South West
Botanical Province east to near Agnew in the Eremean Botanical Province. A very isolated record
200 km further north from Dirk Hartog Island {Martin 32, MEL) may be inaccurate in its locality as
no collections have been made since of the species from this island. The Dirk Hartog Island specimen
has no date but must have been collected by 1883 because it was cited in Mueller (1883).
Habitat. Occurs in a variety of sandy soils, probably mainly on plains, in vegetation dominated by
varied shrub and tree species.
Phenology. Flowers mainly August to December, also recorded July. Fruits recorded October to
December, but only one specimen {G.E. Brockway 33) appears to have mature fruits.
Conservation status. Dicrastylis fulva is a fairly common species, with a range of over 600 km, and
is not considered to be at risk.
Notes. A single specimen of D. fulva {A.C. Burns 3) is atypical in having leaves in whorls of three, all
other specimens having opposite leaves. Occasionalfloralabnormalitiesarefoundinafewspecimens.
For example, one specimen {R. Coveny 7941 & B.R. Maslin) has a few flowers that have eight calyx
lobes and three style branches.
In Dicrastylis fulva most of the leaves are elliptic to broadly ovate rather than narrowly obovate
or obovate as in its closest relative D. soliparma.
Dicrastylis incana Munir (Munir 1978: 484-486). Type: 35 miles [56 km] from Geraldton towards
Mullewa, Western Australia, 30 September 1962, M.E. Phillips {holo: CBG 020641 n.v., photograph
PERTH 03200973).
Dicrastylis morrisonii Munir (Munir 1978: 485-489). Type: State Farm, upper Chapman River, north-
east of Geraldton, Western Australia, 5 November 1903, A. Morrison {holo: PERTH 01 173626).
Illustrations. The holotype of D. incana is illustrated in Figure 12 and the holotype of its synonym
D. morrisonii in Figure 13 of Munir (1978).
Shrubs 0.3-1 .5 m high, with a dense indumentum on the young stems, leaves and inflorescences,
the young shoots usually pale grey-green; indumentum of long patent dendritic hairs with multiple
glands each terminating a short branch. Young stems pale greyish or rarely pale brown or ferruginous,
the larger hairs 2-3.5 mm long. Leaver opposite, usually antrorse, sometimes widely spreading, sessile,
B.L. Rye & M.E. Trudgen, A taxonomic revision of Dicmstylis sect. Dicrastylis
217
narrowly ovate-triangular to narrowly ovate, 1 1-25 x 2. 5-7.5 mm, narrowly to broadly obtuse, with
prominently recurved margins, densely hairy at first, medium grey-green or somewhat ferruginous at
first; lower surface sometimes scarcely visible between the recurved margins, pale grey-green, with a
dense indumentum of long white hairs; upper surface deeply or very deeply bullate, dark green, with
white hairs mainly between the bullae, the larger hairs 1 .5-3 mm long at first but generally becoming
broken off towards the base in older leaves. Panicles 30-80 x 45-140 mm, many-flowered, with white
and sometimes also ferruginous hairs on the axes, bracts and calyx lobes; basal peduncle up to 15 mm
long. Bracts subtending upper branches narrowly or very narrowly ovate to linear, the larger ones
4- 10 mm long. Pedicels up to 5(10) mm long; indumentum 0.8-2.3(3.5) mm long. Flowers mostly
5- merous with occasional 6-merous flowers sometimes present, possibly also occasionally some
4-merous Howers, 3-5 mm long. Calyx with white or rarely pale ferruginous hairs 0.8-2(3) mm long;
tube 0.3-0.4 mm long; lobes narrowly triangular to narrowly ovate, 1 .2-2.3 mm long, usually narrowly
obtuse or acute. Corolla: tube 1 .6-2.2 mm long, glabrous or sparsely hairy on the ribs outside; lobes
obovate-oblong to ovate or broadly so, the largest lobe 2.2-3.6 mm long and the others 1. 3-2.8 mm
long, broadly obtuse, with adistinct glabrous margin outside. Stamens: filament 0.8-2 mm long; anther
0.4-0.5 mm long, dark purplish. Styie with patent dendritic hairs 0.4-0.5 mm long; entire portion
0.7-2.0 mm long; branches 1 .2-2.3 mm long. Fruit c. 1.6x 1.5 mm, with the largesthairs on the summit.
Seed not seen. (Figure 3A)
Other specimens examined. WESTERN AUSTRALIA: East Yuna Reserve, Oct. 1976, B.G. Muir 33 1 ;
12 kmEof Greenough River crossing on Geraldton-Mullewa road, 5 Oct. 1994, S. Patrick2034; 14.8
km N along Valentine Rd from Geraldton-Mount Magnet road W of Eradu, 1 Nov. 1994, S. Patrick
2143; 0.5 mile [0.8 km] E of Greenough River at Eradu, 31 Oct. 1963, R.D. Royce 8020; 1 1 km SE of
Yuna, 29 Sep. 1976, C.l. S’racey 564; Eradu, Nov. 1934,//. Steedman\c. 36kmEofYuna, 8Nov. 1990,
N. & J. Tunbridge 4.
Distribution. Occurs in the northern part of the South West Botanical Province, extending from the
upper Chapman River south to Eradu and east to north of Pooten Crossing (Greenough River).
Habitat. Occurs in sandy soils, often in low or very open woodlands, dominated by a variety of
sandplain species in genera such as Actinostrobus and Grevillea.
Phenology. Flowers: September to November. Fruits recorded in November.
Conservation status. CALM Conservation Codes for Western Australian Flora: Priority Two.
Previously listed twice on the Priority Flora List, first as D. incana with Priority One and the second
time as a presumed extinct species D. morrisonii. Now known from more localities including a flora
reserve and consequently given a reduced priority level.
Notes. This species is the only member of sect. Dicrastylis to have glandular dendritic hairs of the type
illustrated in Figure 3A. These hairs have a number of short branches each terminated by a gland.
The name Dicrastylis morrisonii was published at the same time as D. incana, with both taxa
described from single collections, the former taxon representing an extreme of the variation found
within this species. Seven additional collections are cited above, all closer to the latter type but
including some intermediate states in the characters originally used to distinguish the two taxa. The
type of D. morrisonii appears to be a particularly lush specimen, possibly collected close to the banks
of the Chapman River. D. morrisonii is here reduced to a synonym of the more commonly used name
D. incana.
218
Nuytsia Vol. 12, No. 2 (1998)
Although most specimens have the greyish appearance implied by the epithet incana owing to their
long white or off-white indumentum, one collection (C./. Stacey 564) has pale ferruginous hairs. All
specimens at PERTH have 5-merous (lowers and several (e.g. B.G. Muirh'i 1 ) have occasional 6-merous
flowers. The type specimen of D. incana was reported to have occasional 4-merous flowers (Munir
1978: 485).
Dicrastylis linearifolia Munir (Munir 1978: 468-470). Type: 473 mile post on North West Coastal
Flighway [262 km north of Geraldton, south of Billabong Roadhouse], Western Australia, 1 2 December
1971, A.M. Ashby 4496 {hula: AD n.v., illustration seen; iso: PERTH 01082167).
Illustration. The holotype of I), linearifolia is illustrated in Munir (1978: Figure 7).
Shrubs 1 .5-3 m high, with a dense appressed indumentum on the young stems and inflorescences;
indumentum of sub.sc.ssile scale-like hairs, the young shoots pule grey-green or pale ferruginous-green.
Young steins bright orange or dark orange- brown, with mainly ferruginous hairs up to 0.2 mm long.
Leave.r opposite, antror.se or sometimes fairly widely spreading, .shortly petiolate. Petioles 1-4.5 mm
long. Leaf blades almost linear to narrowly obovate, 1 6-45 x .3-6 mm, acute or obtu.se, with recurved
margins; lower surface pale grey-green, densely covered by an appres.sed white indumentum, with
scattered sessile glands sometimes visible; upper surface medium to dark green, shallowly bullale on
upper surface and becoming glabrous on the bullae but retaining very short white hairs between the
bullae. Panicles usually many-flowered and 20-45 x 30-55 mm, rarely reduced to a few flowers and
only c: 10 mm lung, with ferruginous hairs as well as white hairs on the axes, bracts and calyx lobes;
basal peduncle up to 1 3 mm long. Bracts subtending upper branches usually narrowly ovate to ovate,
the larger ones I -2 mm long. /AY//cx7.vupto3.5 mm long; indumentum c. 0.05 mm long. Flowers mostly
5-merous with occasional 4-nicrou,s flowers sometimes present, 4. 5-6.5 mm long. Calyx with an
indumentum c. 0,05 mm long; tube 0.5-1 .3 mm long; lobes narrowly triangular to ovate, 0.9-i .6 mm
long, usually acute. Corolla: tube 1 .7-2.3 mm long, theoutsidesparsely hairy for a short distance below
the middle and fairly densely hairy above the middle; lobes usually obovate or broadly obovate, the
largest lobe 2.8-4 mm long and the others 2.2-3.3 mm long, broadly obtuse, with a distinct glabrous
margin outside. Stamens: filament 2.5-3. 7 mm long; anther ().6-().7 mm long, pale-coloured or red-
brown. Style with patent dendritic hairs c. 0.3 mm long; entire portion 1.5-3 mm long; branches
I. 5-2. 5 mm long. Fruit 1.8-2. 4 x 1.6-1. 8 mm, fairly uniformly hairy. .S'eer/ not seen.
Other specimens e.xamined. WE.S FERN AUSTRALIA; Iona Station, near Mount Magnet, 25 Sep, 1973,
J. S. Beard 6666; Meadow turnoff, Carnarvon road, 17 Nov. 1968, H. Demarz 707; 0.5 mile N of
419 mile peg on North West Coastal Highway | 173 km N of Geraldton], 7 Dec. 1972,//, Demarz Alll',
439 mile peg on Carnarvon road |2()4 km N of Geraldton], 10 Dec. 1974, //. Demarz 553 1 ; 4 1 3 mile
peg. Great Northern lligliway 1 1 63 km N of Geraldton], 2 1 Jan. 1976, II. Demarz 5991; 438 mile peg
on North West Coastal Highway [203 km N of Geraldton], C.A. GardnerllSS', Cistern I, 40 km N of
Murchison River, 20 Dec. 1 962, C./l. Gardner 14274; 0.75 mile N 0(415 mile peg on Carnarvon road
] 167 km N of Geraldton], 14Dec. 1 9(r4, F. VL //KW!/;/;re>'.v 6333; Binnu, 18Dec. 1962, F. Lullfitz 1954-
438 mile peg |203 km N of Geraldton |, F. Lullfitz2\^5: 435 mile peg on North West Coastal Highway
[ 1 98 km N of Gerakiton], 7 Dec. 1965, F. LidlfltzASSy, 436 mile peg on North West Coastal Highway
]20() km N of Geraldton], I I Dec. 1 966, F. L/(///(rz 5956; Botra paddock, Meka Station, lODec. 1980,
A./). Mitchell 842.
Di.stribution. Occurs m the northern part of the South West Botanical Province from Meadow Station
south to Binnu. Also known from Meka and Iona Stations (both near Mount Magnet) in the Ercmean
Botanical Province.
B.L. Rye & M B. Trudgen, A taxononiie revision of Dicrastylis sect. Dicrastyiis
219
Habitat. Recorded in red sandy soils. Of the two inland records, one is given as a sand ridge and the
other as “howgada [Acacia] sand plain”. The western collections give no information on associated
vegetation or landl'orms except for one mention of sandheath.
Phenology. Flowers recorded in November to December. Fruits recorded December to January.
Consen’ation statu.s. CALM Conservation Codes for Western Australian Flora; Priority Three. This
species is now known from about ten localities over a range of almost 400 km, but none from
conservation reserves.
Notes. This species has the shortest indumentum and the most obviously petiolate leaves known for
section Dicrastyiis. Although the panicles are occasionally reduced to a few flowers, some many-
llowered panicles are present on all specimens. Most specimens appear to have uniformly 5-merous
flowers but some of the Howers are 4-merous on F. Lullfitz 1954.
Dicrastyiis maritima Rye & Trudgen, sp. nov.
Dicrastyli solipannae alTinis sed floribus parvioribus et indumento calycis breviore.
Typus: Peron Peninsula, Western Australia, 4 November 1989, M.E. Trudgen 7375 {holo: PERTH
01224751; /«;.■ CANB, K, MEL).
Shrubs 0. 1-0.5 m high, erect or decumbent, often spreading, with a silvery appearance resulting
from a dense while indumentum of patent dendritic hairs on the stems and leaves. Stems with hairs
commonly 0. 2-0.4 mm long on young stems, up toO.8 mm long on older stems. Leaver opposite, widely
spreading and often somewhat retror.se, subsessile or shortly petiolate. Petioles uplo 1 .3 mm long. Leaf
blades narrowly ovate or narrowly oblong to elliptic, 7-24 x 3-9 mm, obtuse or acute, with recurved
margins, pale green or grey-green, the indumentum in young leaves commonly 0. 1-0.2 mm long over
most of blade but often 0.3-().5 nun long along the midvein, in old leaves becoming sparse and up to
1 mm or more long; lower surface with a dense indumentum and scattered sessile glands; upper surface
very shallowly bullate. Panicles 10-45 x 15-85 mm, many-tlowered, with ferruginous hairs as well
as white hairs on the axes, bracts and calyx lobes; basal peduncle up to 32 mm long. Bracts subtending
upper branches ovate, the larger ones 2-2.5 mm long. Pedicels up to 2.5 mm long; indumentum
0.2-0. 3 mm long. Flowers 4-6-merous but mostly 5-merous, 3-4 mm long. Calyx with white and
ferruginous hairs 0.2-0. 3 mm long; tube 1 .0-1.4 mm long; lobes ovate or broadly ovate, 1 .0-1 .4 mm
long, narrowly obtuse or acute. Corolla: lube 1 .4-1.8 mm long, the outside hairy above the middle,
the indumentum becoming denser towards summit; lobes ovate or broadly ovate, the largest lobe
1.6-2 4 mm long and the others 1. 3-2.0 mm long, broadly obtuse, with a very dense indumentum
throughout the outer surface. Stamens: filament 1.8-3 mm long; anther 0.5-0. 6 mm long, pale
yellowish to medium brown. Style with patent dendritic hairs 0.4-0. 6 mm long; entire portion
1 .0- 1 .8 mm long; branches 1 .5-2 mm long. Fruit 2.0-2. 5 x 1 .9-2.2 mm, fairly uniformly hairy or with
some longer hairs on summit. Seed c. 1 .5 x 0.9 mm, soft, white, with an inconspicuous extremely fine
reticulate pattern on the surface. (Figures 3D, 5)
220
Nuytsia Vol. 12, No. 2 (1998)
Figure 5. Dicrastylis marituna. A - llowering stem (xl), B - lower and upper surfaces of leaf (x3), C - flower
(x7), D - stamen (x 13), E - style (xlO), F - dendritic hair from a style branch (x60), G - fruit (xlO), H - seed
(x8.5). Drawn from M.E. Trudgen 737.3 (A-C), H. Deiiuirz .3508 (C-F) and P.G. Wilson 8238 (G,H).
Other specimens examined. WESTERN AUSTRALIA (all PERTH); Salutation Island, Frcycinet
Estuary, 12Sep, 1989, J.T AZ/orr/; Salutation Island, Freycinet Estuary, 14Sep. ]9^9,J../. Alford 1318;
2 km N of Eagle Bluff, Peion Station, 1 1 Nov. 1982, R.J. Cranfield 2560; Eagle Bluff, 6 Dec. 1974,
H. Demarz 5508; Behind White Beach, Done Island, 1 1 Nov. 1973, T. Evans', By Homestead, Dirk
Hartog Island, 7 Sep. 1972, A. 5. George 11617; Dorre Island, 16 Dec. 1973, K.F. Kenneally 12; Sandy
Point, Dirk Hartog Island, 6 Sep. 1 967, M.H. Near southern part of Useless Inlet, 29 Sep. 1989,
M.E. Trudgen 7374; South Transect, Dorre Island, 16 Aug. 1977, A.S. Weston 10527; S of South
Transect, Dorre Island, 18 Aug. 1977, A. 5. Weston 10545;NofGouletBluff,Peron Peninsula, 22 Mar.
1969, P.G. Wilson 8238.
Distribution. Restricted to the Shark Bay region, extending from Dorre Island south to Useless Loop
in the Eremean Botanical Province and also recorded from Salutation Island in the far north of the South
West Botanical Province.
Habitat. Occurs on off-shore islands and along the coast on the mainland, growing in deep sand on
the upper strand and coastal dunes, also in sand over limestone on coastal cliffs. Recorded in low coastal
shrublands and Spinifex hummock grasslands. Sometimes Dicrastylis maritima is the dominant shrub
species. Like many other coastal plants, the species sometimes has long, more or less horizontal main
stems buried in the shifting sands.
Phenology. Flowers recorded August to December. Fruits recorded December to March.
B.L. Rye & M E. Tradgen, A taxonomic revision of Dicrastylis sect. Dicrastylis
221
Consen'ation status. Although of fairly restricted distribution and habitat, this species is not
considered to be at risk at present. Known from at least ten locations including three nature reserves
or national parks.
Etymology. From the Latin maritimus - by the sea, referring to the coastal distribution of the species.
Notes. The phrase name Dicrastylis sp. Shark Bay (J.J. Alford 1318) has been applied to this species
at PERTH. Dicrastylis maritima can be distinguished from the other members of sect. Dicrastylis by
the more extensive indumentum on the outside of its corolla lobes, which reaches and protrudes slightly
beyond the margin, the other species having a distinct glabrous border to the corolla lobes. It shows
greatest similarity to D. soliparma, differing vegetatively in its usually shorter and broader leaves,
which arc more often patent to retrorse than in the other species, and its more erect branches on the stem
hairs. It also differs from D. soliparma in its usually smaller panicles, smaller flowers, shorter calyx
indumentum and paler anthers.
Dicrastylis maritima is the only member of its genus recorded from coastal dunes, and certainly the
only one known from the strand. It occurs north or north-west of the known ranges of other members
of sect. Dicrastylis, overlapping slightly with D. micrantha and possibly also overlapping with
D.fulva. One odd specimen collected from Peron Peninsula appears to be intermediate in morphology
between D. maritima and D. micrantha. This might possibly be a hybrid or a new variant of one of the
two species but is currently treated as a distinct species under the phrase name Dicrastylis sp. Denham
(M. Lewis Aim).
Two vegetative specimens (M.H. Manning 6/9/1967 and A. 5. Weston 10545) of D. maritima differ
from the flowering and fruiting specimens in having larger mature leaves with a longer sparser
indumentum. Occasional 6-merous flowers or heteromerous flowers (e.g. with six calyx lobes but only
five corolla lobes) have been observed on a number of specimens and occasional 4-merous flowers
observed on other specimens such as the type. The description given above for the fruit and seed is
based on a few fruits from P.G. Wilson 8238 and H. Demarz 5508, the only known fruiting specimens.
Dicrastylis micrantha Munir (Munir 1978: 475-478). Type: About 175 km north of Geraldton,
Western Australia, 2 October 1966, E.A. Shaw 610 (holo: AD n.v., illustrations seen).
Illustrations. The holotype of D. micrantha is illustrated in Munir (1978: Figures 9,10).
Shrubs 0.4- 1 rn high, with a dense indumentum on the young stems, leaves and inflorescences, the
young shoots pale grey-green or pale ferruginous, the vegetative indumentum of minute and much
larger patent branched hairs; large hairs with a sub-basal whorl of non-glandular branches and a thick
main axis terminated by a gland. Young stems dark red-brown to pale ferruginous, the glandular hairs
0.5-1. 3 mm long. Leaves opposite, usually antrorse, sometimes widely spreading, sessile, usually
narrowly obovate, sometimes narrowly oblong-elliptic or narrowly ovate, 17-38 x 3-9.5 mm, acute
to broadly obtuse, with recurved margins; lower surface usually somewhat paler than upper surface,
the indumentum mainly of short star-like hairs but also some long glandular hairs especially on the
midvem, with sessile glands visible within the pits; upper surface moderately deeply to deeply bullate,
medium to dark green, with a mixture of short star-like and long glandular hairs, the glandular hairs
up to 1 mm long. Panicles (25)40-160 x (30)60-200 mm, many-Bowered, with deep pink or
ferruginous hairs as well as white hairs on the axes, bracts and calyx lobes; basal peduncle up to
50 mm long. Bracts subtending upper branches narrowly ovate to narrowly obovate, the larger ones
222
Nuytsia Vol. 12, No. 2 (1998)
2.5-4 mm long. Pedicels up to 3 mm long; indumentum 0.2-0.4 mm long. Flowers A-6-memus but
mostly 5-mcrous, 2-3 mm long. Calyx with hairs 0.2-0.35 mm long; lubeO.3-0.5 mm long; lobes ovate
or narrowly ovate to narrowly oblong, 1-1.5 mm long, usually narrowly obtuse or acute. Corolla: tube
1 .2-1 .7 mm long, the outside hairy near base of each corolla lobe and glabrous or subglabrous on the
ribs; lobes obovate to broadly ovate, the largest lobe 1 .4-2 mm long and the others 0.9-1 .6 mm long,
broadly obtuse, with a distinct glabrous margin outside. Stamens: filament 1.4-2. 5 mm long; anther
0. 3-0.4 mm long, dark purple to black. Style with patent dendritic hairs 0.3-0.4 mm long; entire portion
0.6- 1 .3 mm long; branches 0.5- 1 .5 mm long. Fruit c. 1 .3 x 0.7 mm but possibly not fully mature, with
the largest hairs on the summit. not seen. (Figure 3B)
Other specimens examined. WESTERN AUSTRALIA: Carnarvon-Geraldton road nearer Geraldton,
Sep. 1968, K. Baird’, Between Hamelin and Tamala, 10 Oct. l973,/5. Beard 619C, 436 miles along
North West Coastal Highway 1200 km N of Geraldton 1, 2 Oct. 1 966, E.M. Bennett 1 477; Tamala Station,
1 2 Oct. 1973, J.S. Beard 68 1 6; Useless Loop-Tamala road, 27 Oct. 1 974, J.R. Cannon 331, 0.5 mile
N of 44 1 mile peg on Carnarvon road 1 209 km N of Geraldton], 17 Nov. 1 968, /7. Demarz 7 1 1 ; 23 km
NofNerren Ncrren, 3 Oct. 1985, H. Demarz 10802; Murchison area, 1 1 Dec. 1985,//. Demarz 11187;
16 miles [26 km| S of Wannoo Roadhouse, North West Coa.stal Highway, 9 Sep. 1970, A.S'. George
10368; Carnarvon District, Oct. 1966, /.A. Hutchinson’, mW&p&gon North We.st Coastal Highway
[158kmNofGeraldton|,20Dec. 1962, F. Liillfitz 1962; 426 mile peg on North West Coastal Highway
[184 km N of Geraldton], 20 Oct. 1965, F. LullfitzA29A’, c. 14.5 miles [23 km] S of Wannoo, 17 Sep.
1968, M.E. Phillips.
Distribution. Extends from Useless Loop in the Eremean Botanical Province south-east to between
Nerren Nerren Station and Kalbarri National Park in the north of the South West Botanical Province,
a range of c. 170 km.
Habitat. Recorded from red sand or sandplain, one record from “intermediate sandplain (Acacia-
Hakea-Melaleuca)" .
Phenology. Flowers: September to December. Fruits recorded in December.
Conservation status. CALM Conservation Codes for Western Australian Flora: Priority Three. Known
from a fairly restricted distribution ( 150 km) and not known from any conservation reserves.
Notes. This species can be readily identified by the very distinctive indumentum on its stems. The
larger hairs are comprised of a thick patent axis of c. 5 elongate cells and a whorl of short spreading
non-glandular branches located at the Junction of the two basal cells, the axis terminated by a gland
(Figure 3B). All other species in sect. Dicrastylis have the hairs branched towards the summit or for
most of their length, not just near the base and not forming a simple whorl.
The largest leaves of the PERTH specimens are all in the range 3-9.5 mm wide, but according to
the original de.scription the leaves are occasionally as large as 10-15 mm wide. Although the flowers
are small, they are arranged in a very large inflorescence with long branches. Flowers are mostly
5-merou.s, with occasional 4-merous (lowers observed on a number of specimens, while 6-merous
(lowers were observed only on .I.S. Beard 68 1 6.
Two specimens collected from areas that are far outside the known range of this species were
previously included under it but are excluded here. Thc.sehave now been redetermined as D. parvifolia
and are discussed under that species.
B.L. Rye & M.K. Trudgen, A taxonomic revision of Dicrastylis sect. Dicrastylis
223
Dicrastylis obovata Munir (Munir 1978:465-468). Type; Frank Hann National Park, west of 90 Mile
Tank, Western Australia, 10 December \ 97 \,R.D. Royce 10231 {holo: PERTH 01603574).
Illustration. The holotype of D. obovata is illustrated in Munir (1978: Figure 6).
5/2rM/«().4-1.7 m high, with a dense appressed indumentum on the young stems and inflorescences,
the young shoots pale grey-green; indumentum of subsessile scale-like hairs. Young stems yellowish
to orange-brown at first, becoming dark ferruginous with age, with white and ferruginous hairs up to
0.2 mm long. Leaves opposite or rarely in whorls of three, antrorse, subsessile or shortly petiolate.
Petioles up to 1 ,3 mm long. Leaf blades ohovate or broadly obovate, 6-16x3-10 mm, broadly obtuse,
with recurved margins, usually moderately densely hairy at first, with scattered sessile glands often
visible; lower surface usually appearing slightly paler then upper surface and more distinctly
reticulate-patterned, the pits densely white-hairy, the ridges tending to become glabrous and medium
green; upper surlace very shallowly bullale to rugose, medium green, with hairs c. 0.1 mm long.
Panicles 15-50 x 1 5-65 mm, many-flowered, with ferruginous hairs as well as white hairs on the axes
and bracts; basal peduncle up to 4 mm long. Bracts subtending upper branches usually narrowly ovate,
the larger ones commonly 2-4 mm long. Pedicels up to 4 mm long; indumentum c. 0.1 mm long.
Flowers mostly 5-merous, with occasional 4-merous flowers sometimes present, 4-6 mm long. Calyx
often with deep pink and/or ferruginous hairs as well as white hairs c. 0. 1 mm long; tube c. 0.5 mm long;
lobes ovate or narrowly ovate, commonly 1.5-2 mm long, usually narrowly obtuse, with a distinct
glabrous margin outside. Corolla: tube commonly 1 .7-2.5 mm long, largely glabrous outside but hairy
below each corolla lobe; lobes broadly or very broadly ovate, the largest lobe 2.4-3 mm long and the
others 1.3-2 mm long, broadly obtuse. Stamens: filament 2-2.5 mm long; anther 0.4-0.5 mm long,
pale-coloured. Style with pcllate-dcndritic hairs 0.2-0.3 mm long; entire portion 1. 5-2.3 mm long;
branches 1 .5—2.5 mm long. Fruit c. 1 .5 x 1 .4 mm but not seen at maturity, fairly uniformly hairy. Seed
not seen. (Figure 3F)
Other. specimens examined. WESTERN AUSTRALIA: 36.9 km E of Vermin Proof Fence along Lake
King-Norseman road, Frank Hann National Park, 1 9 Sep. 1 993, G.F. Craig 29 1 0; Lake King-Norseman
road, 30 Oct. 1988, £.7. Croxfbrd 6244; 25 miles [40 kmj Wof 90 Mile Tank, 170ct. \914,H. Demarz
5366; Between Forrestania and Lake King, 25 Nov. 1 964, CA. Gardner; 46.2 miles [74 kml E of Lake
King crossroads, 14 Nov. 1965, F.W. Himphrey.s; 46.3 miles [75 km] E of Lake King crossroads,
14Nov. \965, F.W. Humphreys; 45 km SW of 90 Mile Tank, Frank Hann National Park, 1 3 Nov. 1979,’
K.R. Newbey 6505; 28 miles [45 km[ W of 90 Mile Tank, 17 Oct. 1974, E. Wittwer 1446; 23 miles
[37 km[ E of vermin fence. Lake King to Daniel, 28 Nov. 1974, E. Wittwer 1487.
Distribution. Recorded from west of Lake Hope and from Frank Hann National Park in the South West
Botanical Province.
Habitat. Recorded mainly growing in yellow sand on ridges or low dunes, with Grevillea excelsior
or other shrub or malice species.
Phenology. Flowers: October to November. Fruits: November to December, judging from the only
Iruiting specimen (E. Wittwer 1487), which bore immature fruits in late November.
Comservation .status. CALM Conservation Codes for Western Australian Flora: Priority Two.
Although the species occurs in a large national park, it is known from only a few localities in a small
area and a recent survey ol this area (Diana Papenfus pers. comm.) has failed to relocate the species.
224
Nuytsia Vol. 12, No. 2 (1998)
Notes. Readily distinguished from other members of section Dicrastylis by its rather short and broad
obovate leaves.
Dicrastylis parvifolia F. Muell. (Mueller 1861: 160). Type: East River, near Stokes Inlet, [Western
Australia], G. Maxwell {lecto: MEL 40917, fide Munir (1978: 470); isolecto: MEL n.v.).
Dicrastylis 1 rosinarinifoliaTutcz. (Turczaninow 1 863: 226). Type: [Western Australia],/ Drummond
coll. 4, 236 (holo: KW n.v., photograph PERTH; iso: PERTH 01603582).
Illustration. (Munir 1978: Figure 8).
Shrubs 0. 15-0.6 m high with a dense semi-appressed indumentum of peltate-dendritic hairs on the
young stems and inflorescences, the young shoots pale grey-green to almost white. Stems pale grey-
brown to ferruginous or white at first, with white or ferruginous hairs, the larger ones 0. 1-0.2 mm long.
Leaves opposite, antrorsc or sometimes widely spreading, usually subsessile. Petioles up to 0.7 mm
long. Leaf blades usually almost linear or narrowly ovate to narrowly obovate, rarely ovate to obovate,
5-20 X 1-3. 5(5) mm, narrowly to broadly obtuse, with recurved margins, usually concolorous; lower
surface with a dense white indumentum and scattered sessile glands; upper surface shallowly bullate,
with hairs up to 0.2 mm long. Panicles 12-1 15 x 15-65 mm, many-flowered, with ferruginous hairs
as well as white hairs on the axes and sometimes on the bracts and apex of each calyx lobe; basal
peduncle up to 30 mm long. Bracts subtending upper branches ovate or narrowly ovate, the larger ones
1. 7-2.5 mm long. Pedicels upio 1 mm long; indumentum 0..3-0.6 mm long. F/ovver^ 4-6-merous but
mostly 5-merous, 2-3 mm long. Calyx with hairs 0.2-0.4 mm long; tube 0.4-0.6 mm long; lobes ovate
or narrowly ovate, 0,5-1. 0 mm long, usually obtuse. Corolla: tube 0.9-1. 5 mm long, glabrous or
subglabrous on the ribs outside, often only sparsely hairy near base of each corolla lobe; lobes obovate-
oblong or broadly so, the largest lobe 1 .5-2.3 mm long and the others 0.8-1 .7 mm long, broadly obtuse,
with adistinct glabrous margin outside. Stamens: filament 2. 1-2.7 mm long; anther 0.25-0.3 mm long,
pale to medium brown. Style with patent dendritic hairs 0.3-0.5 mm long; entire portion 0.4-1 .3 mm
long; branches 2.0-3. 3 mm long. Fruit 0.6-\ .3 x 0.6-0. 7 mm, fairly uniformly hairy. Seed not seen.
Selected specimens examined. WESTERN AUSTRALIA: Burra Rock Nature Reserve, 60 km SE of
Coolgardie, 14Nov. 1988,/!. Chapman!^', 16kmESEofBiljahnieRockonverminfence, 3Dcc. 1997,
R.J. Cranfield 1 1747;3 kmNofLakeKurrenkutten, 22Nov. 1995,/?. DavA 363; 32.5 km NofHyden,
22 Nov. \ 985, D.B. Foreman 1 165; Water Reserve 1 , Kulin, 15 Dec. 1994,5. Murray 158;StennetRock,
c. 50 km SSW of Norseman, 27 Sep. 1980, K.R. Newbeyl674\ N of Gabbin,27 Oct. 1963, S.B. Rosier
385; Goddard Creek, N of Zanthus, 27 Jan. 1956, R.D. Royce 5344; 58 km N of Salmon Gums, 9 Nov.
1982, A. Strid 2\299.
Distribution. Occurs in the South West Botanical Province and South-western Interzone, extending
from Whitewells Station (north-east of Wubin) and Wubin, south-east to Oldfield River and east to
Queen Victoria Springs.
Habitat. Occurs in sandy soils, commonly on sandplains, dominated by a wide variety of shrub and
tree species.
Phenology. Flowers: mainly late October to January. Fruits recorded December to January.
Conservation status. The most common and widely distributed member of sect. Dicrastylis.
B.L. Rye & M.E. Trudgen, A taxonomic revision of Dicrastylis seel. Dicrastylis
225
Notes. This widespread species is extremely variable. A specimen from north of Zanthus {R.D. Royce
5344), which was included by Munir (1978) in D. micrantha, is actually a particularly large-leaved
variant of D. paiyifolia with lush growth, presumably due to its growing near a watercourse in very
favourable conditions. A second specimen (S.B. Rosier 385) previously included in D. micrantha is
quite typical of D. parvifolia.
Dicrastylis parvifoliacsm produce an interrupted seriesoferectstemsalongahorizontal underground
stem as in A.S. George 5956, although the single-stemmed shrub habit is far more common.
Most specimens of D. parvifolia can be readily distinguished from other members of section
Dicrastylis by their very small narrow leaves. The species generally has more deeply divided styles
than other species, the entire portion only 0.4-1 .2 mm long and the two branches up to seven times
longer. Where the style is not more deeply branched than in other species, it differs instead in having
the dendritic hairs restricted to the base of the entire portion rather than extending up to the branches
of the style.
Dicrastylis soliparma Rye & Trudgen, sp. nov.
Dicrastylis fiilva f. angustifolia Munir (Munir 1978: 484). Type: 300 mile peg on Mullewa-Morawa
road. Western Australia, 22 September 1968, A.C. Burns 74 (holo: PERTH 01603108).
Dicrastyli fulvae arete affine sed pilis supra caulem brevioribus et magis lepidoideis, foliis
praecipue anguste obovatis vel obovatis differt.
Typus: Canna Siding, Western Australia, November 1 933, C.A. Gardner s.n. {holo: PERTH 03666697 ;
Ao.CANB.K).
Shrubs 0.3-1 ( 1 .5) m high, with a dense white and/or ferruginous indumentum on the young stems,
leaves and intlorescences, the young shoots white to pale green or pale ferruginous. Young stems pale
to dark ferruginous, with peltate-dendritic to subsessile hairs, the larger hairs 0.05-0.2(0.3) mm long,
often with somewhat longer hairs occurring on the innore,scence axes. Leaves opposite, usually
antrorse to patent, rarely retrorse, subsessile or shortly petiolate, densely covered at first by an
indumentum of somewhat scalc-like hairs. Petioles up to 1 mm long. Leaf blades mostly narrowly
obovate to obovatc, 10-27(39) x 3-9 mm, narrowly to broadly obtuse, with recurved margins; lower
surface usually distinctly paler than upper surface at maturity, becoming sparsely hairy with age and
the se.ssile glands within the pits becoming visible; upper surface usually pale to medium green at first
and becoming dark green, shallowly to moderately deeply bullate, with hairs c. 0.1 mm long. Panicles
20-65 x (25)35- 1 1 0( 1 45) mm, with ferruginous hairs as well as white hairs on the axes and bracts; basal
peduncle up to 60 mm long. Bracts subtending upper branches ovate or narrowly ovate, the larger ones
2.5-5 mm long. Pedicels up to 4 mm long; indumentum 0.3-0.8 mm long. Flowers mostly 5-merous
with occasional 6-merous tlowers sometimes present, 4—6 mm long. Calyx with hairs 0.5- 1 .3 mm long,
either with all the hairs white or with ferruginous or pink hairs in distal half; tube 0.5-1 mm long; lobes
ovate or narrowly ovate, 0.9-1. 4(2.3) mm long, usually narrowly obtuse. Corolla: tube 1.3-2. 2 mm
long, the outside uniformly dendritic-hairy above the middle or hairy between the ribs, with hairs
sometimes becoming denser towards summit; lobes obovate-oblong or broadly so, the largest lobe
2. 2-3. 4 mm long and the others 1. 1-2.0 mm long, broadly obtuse, with a distinct glabrous border
around the margin outside. Stamens: filament 1 .3-3 mm long; anther 0.4-0.5 mm long, dark purplish
black. Style with patent dendritic hairs 0.4- 1.1 mm long; entire portion 0.8-2. 3 mm long; branches
226
Nuytsia Vol. 12, No. 2 (1998)
I. 3-3 mm long. Fruit \ .5-2.2 x 1 .4-1 .8 mm, with the longest hairs towards summit. Seedc. 1.3 x
0.65 mm, soft, pale yellow-brown or whitish, with an inconspicuous fine reticulate pattern on the
surface. (Figures 3E, 4D-I)
Selected specimens examined (typical variant). WESTERN AUSTRALIA: Wilroy, 4 Dec. 1962,
J. Beard & F. SE of Coolcalalaya Station. 13 Oct. 1988, A.//. 4433; 2 miles [3 km]
Nof Perenjori, 8 Dec. 1955, MT. finr/jir/ge 4695; 22.5 km NE of Yandanooka, 24 Oct. 1994, A. Carr
3 1 1 ; 25.8 km N of Perenjori on Morawa road, Oct. 1982, J. Coleby-Williams 248; 1 9 km SSW of Mt
Gibson, 21 Nov. 1992,/?../. Crany/e/t/ 85 1 0; Latham, 1945, C.A. Gart//ier; 6 miles [10km] W of Pindar,
10 Oct. 1945, C.A. Gardner 7780; Along the road between Wubin and Paynes Find, 30 Nov. 1994,
E.D. Kabay 1 189; N of East Yuna Reserve on Wandin Rd, 7.6 km E of the junction with Bindoo Rd,
1 Nov. 1994, S, P«fr(c/:2149; 10 miles ] 1 6 km] S of Tardun, 1 Oct. 1962, M.F. P/i/////w 1698; 5 1 .5 km
W of Yalgoo, 14 Oct. 1983, C.I. Stacey 742.
Specimens examined (noahern variant). WESTERN AUSTRALIA: 13 km SofWannoo, 24 Nov. 1996,
T.F. Houston 900-5; Peron Peninsula, 20 Nov. 1989, M.E. Trudgen 7313.
Distribution. Occurs mainly in the north of the South West Botanical Province, extending from Peron
Peninsula south-east to near Jibberding Station (north-east of Wubin), with one record from the
Eremean Botanical Province near Wydgee (north of Paynes Find). The typical variant extends from
west of Lake Nerramyne south-east to Jibberding and Wydgee. An atypical northern variant has been
recorded from Peron Peninsula and near Wannoo, the disjunction between these specimens and the
remainder of the known range of the species being about 1 15 km.
Habitat. Occurs in a variety of sandy soils, often on sandplains.
Phenology. Flowers October to December. Fruits November to January.
Conservation status. The typical variant is known from numerous populations and is not considered
to be at risk. However, the northern variant is known from only two collections and needs further study
to determine its taxonomic status and conservation status.
Etymology. From the Latin sol - sun and parma - small shield, referring to the parasol-like nature of
the hairs, with the much-branched summit forming a covering perpendicular to the stalk.
Notes. The phrase name Dicrastylis sp. Peron Peninsula {M. E. Trudgen 7373) has been used at PERTH
for the poorly known northern variant of this species. This differs from the typical variant in its more
silvery appearance and usually shorter calyx indumentum. It does not appear to be sufficiently distinct
to treat as a separate species but may warrant recognition at the subspecific level and may need to be
added to the Priority Flora List. One of the northernmost collections (S. Patrick 2149) of the typical
variant has rather silvery leaves and shows the closest approach to the northern variant.
The typical variant ol Dicrastylis solipanna was included within Dicrastylis fulva by Munir ( 1 979).
The latter species can be distinguished by its longer indumentum on the sterns, with patent dendritic
hairs rather than peltate-dendritic ones, and by its mostly elliptic to broadly ovate leaf blades, D. fulva
also tends to have more ferruginous young leaves, longer bracts that are subsessile rather than sessile,
more commonly reddish-haired llowerbuds, and a longer corolla that is usually less hairy on the outside
of the tube, but the two species show some overlap m all of the.se characters.
B.L. Rye & M.E. Trudgen. A laxononiic revision of Dicrastylix sect. Dicmstylis
111
Included within the typical \aTmnloi' Dicrastytis soliparma areafew specimens with relatively long
narrow leaves and a more distinctly crenate margin than usual that have been called DicrasTylis fulva
f, angustifolia. These specimens intergrade fully with other specimens, some of which have long narrow
leaves with the margin not very distinctly crenate and some of which have shorter broader leaves with
a distinctly crenate margin. Consequently the form is not recognized here.
Probable new taxa
The specimens discussed below cannot be placed in the taxa described above and appear to
represent new species, but could be abnormal specimens or hybrids. There is also a possible new
infraspecilic taxon noted under D. solipanna (sec above).
Dicrastylix sp. Cue (A. A. Mitchell 764). This taxon is known from two immature specimens, both
collected in the Cue area by A. A. Mitchell and possibly both from the same granite outcrop on Coodardy
Station (Andrew Mitchell pers. comm.). Dicrastylix sp. Cue is a large shrub 1-3 m high and has very
large leaves, perhaps in response to its preference for the runoff zone of granite outcrops. Its
indumentum and other characters seem to place it closest to D. fulva and D. solipanna, but it tends to
be more glandular, having numerous sessile glands on the undersurface of the leaves. The two
specimens of Dicrastylis sp. Cue are in bud in September and mid October respectively, but the one
collected in October has a few flowers just opened, which appear to be smaller than the flowers of
D. fulva and D. solipanna. CALM Conservation Codes for Western Australian Flora; Priority One.
Dicrastylis sp. Denham (M. Lewis 42/92). The only known collection of this taxon was made on 26
September 1 992 from south of Denham on the Peron Peninsula, in grey sand with hummock grassland.
Dicrastylis sp. Denham is similar to D. micrantha in its habit, inflorescence form and floral characters,
such as its black anthers c. 0.3 mm long, but is more like D. maritima in its indumentum on the vegetative
parts and in its shortly pctiolate leaves. More material is needed to determine its taxonomic status.
CALM Conservation Codes for Western Australian Flora: Priority One,
Acknowledgements
We would like to thank Paul Wilson for translating the diagnoses into Latin and for advice on
nomenclature, and Barry Conn for his comments as referee. The illustrations were expertly drawn by
Margaret Pieroni,
References
Beard, .I„S. (1980), A new phylogeographic map of W'estern Australia. We.xtern Australian Herbarium Research Notes
3: 37-,S8.
Cantino, P,D„ Harley, R.M. & Wagstaff, S..!, (1992). Genera of Labiatae: status and classification, tn: Harley, R.M.
& Reynolds, T. (cds) "Advances in Labiate Science.” (Royal Botanic Gardens: Kew, London.)
Harvey, W.H. (1855). Lxiracts from .'Xuslralian letters of Dr. Harvey. Hooker’s Journal of Botany and Kew Garden
Miscellany 7: 47-58.
Mueller, F. (1859). Verbenaccae in: “Fraginenta Phytographiae Australiae.” Vol. 1. pp. 233-237. (J, Ferres:
Melbourne. I
Mueller, F. (1861). Verbenaccae. In: “Fragmcnta Phytographiae Australiae,” Vol. 2. p. 160. (J. Ferres: Melbourne.)
Mueller, F. (1883). “The plants indigenous around Shark's Bay and its Vicinity.” (Government Printer: Perth.)
228
Nuytsia Vol. 12, No. 2 (1998)
Munir, A.A. (1978). Taxonomic revision of Chloanthaceae trib. Physopsideae. Brunonia 1: 407-692.
Munir, A.A. (1991), Two new species of Dicrastylis .1. Drutnm. ex Harvey (Chloanthaceae) from Western Australia.
Journal of Ike Adelaide Botanic Gardens 14: 85-92.
Olmstead, R.G., Reeves, P.A. & Lepschi, B.J. (in press). Confirmation of a inonophyletic Chloanthoideae (Lamiaceae)
comprising tribes Chloantheac and Prostanthereae. Uimiales Newsletter.
Rye, B.L. (1996). A taxonomic review of the genera Lucknostachys, Newcastelia and Physopsis (Chloanthaceae) in
Western Australia. Nuytsia II: 79-107.
Trudgen, M.E. & Kcighery, G.J. (1995). Flora of the Shark Bay World Heritage Area and environs. Unpublished
Report for the Australian Heritage Commission.
Turczaninow, N. (1863). Verbenaceae et Myoporaceae nonnullae hucusque indescriptae. Bulletin de la Societe
Imperiale de.s Naluralistes de Moscnu 36(3): 193-227.
Nuytsia I2(2):229-231(1998)
229
Anthotium odontophyllum (Goodeniaceae), a new species
from Western Australia
L.W. Sage
Cl- Western Australian Herbarium, Department of Conservation and Land Management,
Locked Bag 104, Bentley Delivery Centre, Western Australia 6983
Abstract
Sage, L.W. Anthotium odontophyllum (Goodeniaceae), a new species from Western Australia.
Nuytsia 12 (2): 229-231 (1998). Anthotium odontophyllum Sage is described. It is endemic to the
Western Australian wheatbelt, specifically the Dale and Avon Districts of the South West Botanic
Province. Amendments to the key to Anthotium in the “Flora of Australia” are provided.
Introduction
In the course of exatnining collections at the Western Australian Herbarium, material belonging
to an undescribed species of Anthotium R. Br. (Goodeniaceae) was recognized amongst material placed
in A. humile R. Br. Morrison ( 1 992) included this taxon within his concept of A. humile, but detailed
examination showed it to be a distinct species. The new species is related to Anthotium humile and
A. rubriflorum F. Muell. ex Benth.
Taxonomy
Anthotium odontophyllum Sage, sp. nov.
A Anthotio Immili indusio cl pctalis infcrioribus pilis glandularibus ornatis, a A. rubrifloro petalis
cremeis el pedunculis brevioribus reccdit.
Typus: Junction of Dumbcrning Rd and Forestry West Rd, Highbury State Forest (33'’04' S, 1 1 7'’06' E),
Western Australia, 6 December 1 996, G.S. Durell 1 32 (holo: PERTH 04552679; iso: CANB, K, NSW).
Tufted clonal herb, v</'\lh c. 4 separate tufts connected underground to a central rootstock, to 8 cm
high and 7 cm wide. Leaves uW basal, Hat, spathulate, 12-58 mm long, 2-6 mm wide, margins usually
denticulate; apex acute. Flowering stalks ribbed, typically curved, 0.9-3 cm long, usually just shorter
230
Nuytsia Vol. 12, No. 2 (1998)
than the leaves; head compact, each of up to 9 crowded cymes; bracts linear, terete, though mostly
flattened near the base, 5.5-14 mm long, 0.8-1. 5 mm wide, apex obtuse to acute; bracleoles linear to
triangular, 3.4-5. 8 mm long, c. I mm wide, apex acute to acuminate. Calyx lobes 3-4 inm long,
0.6-1. 1 mm wide, apex acute to acuminate. Corolla cream, auricles sometimes purplish red; tube
c. 1 mm long, inferior petals fused for a further 0.4-0.6 mm; inferior lobes 2. 7-3.5 mm long,
1. 2-1.5 mm wide, with glandular hairs on the inner anterior margins, auricle 1.2-1. 8 mm long,
1-1.5 mm wide; superior lobes 2. 5-4. 8 mm long, 0.7-1. 2 mm wide, wings 1.6-3. 2 mm long,
0.4-0. 5 mm wide. Staminal filaments 0J-] .7 mm long; anthers 0.9-1 .2 mm long. Ovary 22-3.5 mm
long, ribbed, with 6-8 pairs of ovules per loculc. ^ry/e bent or curved, 2. 9-3. 5 mm long; indusium with
simple glandular hairs near the base. Fruit not seen.
Other specimens e.xarnined. WESTERN AUSTRALIA: Highbury State Forest, 6 Dec 1 996, G.S. Diirell
133 (PERTH); Mokine road, S of Narrogin, 6Dec. 1 996, G.S. Durell\3A (PERTH); Foxes Lair, Narrogin,
6 Dec. 1 996, G.5.DH/e// 1 35 (PERTH); Tulannmg Reserve, 14 Dec. \91Q,A.S.George 1 05 17 (PERTH);
S of Dumberning Siding, Narrogin to Arthur River, 26 Nov. 1984, G.J. Keighery 7861 (PERTH);
Dryandra State Forest, 26 Nov. 1987, D.A7. Ro.ve 546 (PERTH); Dryandra State Forest, 30 Nov. 1987,
D.M. Rose 556 (PERTH); Highbury Block, 22 Nov. 1995, L.J. Silvester 5 (PERTH);
Distribution. Occurs from Highbury in the Narrogin region, northwards to Dryandra National Park and
Tutanning reserve in the western wheatbelt of Western Australia. This area is included in the Dale and
Avon Botanical Districts in the South West Botanical Province of Western Australia.
Habitat. Occurs mostly in open Eucalyptus wandoo Blakely woodland over low heath, in mostly sandy
clay soil.
Conservation status. Common within its distribution, with at least three populations located within
nature reserves.
Etymology. The specific epithet, odontophyllum is from the Latin odonto - toothed, and phyllum -
leaf, in reference to the minutely toothed leaf margins of the species.
Ajfinities. Anthotium odontophyllum is allied to 4. humile and A. rubriflorum. Anthotium Immile
typically has entire linear-terete leaves to I mm wide (rarely to 2.5 mm when not inrolled), flowering
stalks that are typically straight and inferior petals fused for 1. 3-2.5 mm from the corolla tube.
A. odontophyllum has denticulate spathulate leaves to 6 mm wide, typically curved flowering stalks
and inferior petals fused for ().4-().6 mm from the corolla tube. A. odontophyllum can be readily
distinguished from A. rubriflorum by its cream petals, much shorter llowcring stalks and smallerovary
length. Morrison (1992) included A. odontophyllum in his description of A. humile', this would seem
to have been due to a lack of adequate specimens at the time. Morrison’s dc.scription of 4. humile docs
not include the presence of glandular hairs near the base of the indusium and inner anterior margins
of the inferior lobes which are clearly present on all the PERTH specimens.
L.W. Sage, Antliotiuin odontophyllum. a new species from WA
231
Key to the species
The Anthotiurn key in the “Flora of Australia” (Morrison 1992) should be altered to read as follows.
I Leaves lanceolate or spalhulate, 2-6 mm wide, Hat, sometimes serrulate
or denticulate
2 Petals usually bright scarlet; flowering stalks 9-16 cm long, usually twice
as long as the leaves; ovary 4-5 mm long A. rubriflorum
2: Petals cream or off white, auricles sometimes purplish red; Powering
stalks 0,9-3 cm long, usually just shorter than the leaves;
ovary 2. 2-3.5 mm long A. odontophyllin
1 : Leaves linear to terete, 0.5-1 mm wide (rarely 2.5 mm wide when not inrolled)
3 Flowering stems 2-7 cm long; corolla usually creamy white A.humile
3: Flowering stems 12-40 cm long; corolla pale blue or mauve A. juneiforme
Acknowledgements
The author is grateful to Greg Durell for his collection of plant material, to Paul G. Wilson for the
Latin diagnosis, Carol Wilkins for suggesting the specific epithet and Brendan Lepschi for his thoughts
on the manuscript.
References
Monison, D.A. (1989). The genus Anthotium. Nuytsia 7: 49-S8.
Morrison, D.A. (1992). Anthotium. In\ George, A..S. (ed.) “Flora of Australia.” Vol. 3S. pp. 15-16. (Australian
Government Publishing Service: Canberra.)
232
Nuytsia Vol. 12, No. 2 (1998)
Nuytsia 1 2(2):233-238(1998)
233
New subspecies of Goodenia drummondii and G. laevis (Goodeniaceae)
from the south-west of Western Australia
L.W. Sage
C/- Western Australian Herbarium, Department of Conservation and Land Management,
Locked Bag 104, Bentley Delivery Centre, Bentley, Western Australia 6983
Abstract
Sage, L.W. New subspecies of Goodenia drummondii and G. laevis (Goodeniaceae) from the south-
west of Western Australia. Nuytsia 1 2(2): 233-238 (1998). Goodenia drummondii suhsp.megaphylla
Sage and G. laevis subsp. humifusa Sage are described and mapped. In both cases the new subspecies
is geographically distinct from the typical subspecies. G. drummondii subsp. megaphylla grows taller
than the typical subspecies, has leaves that arc longer, longer corolla lobes and longer flowering spikes.
G. laevis subsp. humifusa differs from the typical subspecies in its prostrate rather than erect habit and
in its broader leaves that are sometimes lobed.
Introduction
Carolin’s (1992: 171) treatment of Goodenia helmsii (E. Fritz.) Carolin (Goodeniaceae) in the
“Flora of Australia” mentions a collection (A.S. George 464) that “has leaves 6 cm long. . .in many ways
approaching G. drummondii". The author was able to rediscover this population with the help of
eminent botanist Alex George, whose collection was made in 1960, and to locate several additional
specimens and new populations of the same taxon. From studying this material, the author determined
that recognition of a new subspecies of G. drummondii was required.
Goodenia laevis is described in the “Flora of Australia” as being “procumbent or ascending”
(Bcntham 1868: 61). Charles Gardner noted on his collection of G. laevis from Lake King,
(C. A. Gardner i. n . , Nov. 1 93 1 ) that it appeared to match the type collection “but some stems are erect:
all leaves are smaller than mine”. Examination of C. laevis material at PERTH by the author revealed
that there are two distinct variants of the species. The variants are geographically and morphologically
distinct and therefore the author has decided that a new subspecies of G. laevis also requires recognition.
234
Nuytsia Vol. 12, No. 2 (1998)
Taxonomy
Key to the subspecies of Goodenia drummondii
Longest leaves to 7.8 cm long, 0,3-2, 2 mm wide, entire; corolla 6-8.3 mm
long, lobes 3. 2-4. 3 mm long; llowering spike to 44 cm long
(Armadale to Norlham area) subsp, megaphylla
Longest leaves to 4 cm long, 1 .0-4.0 mm wide, dentate; corolla c. 6 mm
long, lobes c. 2.5 mm long; flowering spike to 20 cm long
(Kalbarri National Park to Lalham) subsp. drummondii
Goodenia drummondii Carolin subsp. megaphylla Sage, subsp. nuv.
Differt a Goodenia drummondii subsp. drummondii folds ct floribus grandioribus, lobis florum
grandioribus, et statura majore.
Typus: Darling Range, cast of Armadale [precise locality withheld for conservation purposes), Western
Australia, L.W. 95 1,27 November 1996 {holo: PERTH 04782763; wo.- AD, CANB, K, MEL, NY,
PERTH (6 sheets)).
Erect shrub to 1 .2 m tall, glabrous except for a few hairs in the leaf axils. Leaves cunXma, fasciculate,
linear, entire, Rat, thick; main stem leaves 1 .2-7.8 cm long, 0.3-2. 2 mm wide. Inflorescence a spike
to 44 cm; bracts linear to triangular, 1.7-2. 5 mm long, not exceeding the sepals, acute; bracteoles
similar, 1 .2-1 .6 mm long, narrowly ovate, 1-1.7 mm long, acute. Coro//a white with purplish
spots in the throat, 6-8.3 mm long; lobes equal, 3. 2-4. 3 mm long, wings 0. 3-0.6 mm wide. Staminal
filaments c. 2.5 mm long; anthers 1-1.5 mm long.
Other specimens e.samined [precise localities withheld]. WESTERN ALfSTRALIA: Off Brookton
Highway, 19 Nov. 1981, f^-7. Cranfleld 1 978 (PERTH); Type locality, 1 Jan. I960, A. 5. George 464
(PERTH); SW of Northam, 12 Nov. 1985, G.J. Keigher)’ & J.J. Alford 41?, (PERTH); SW of York,
14 Nov. 1996, L.W. Sage 945 (PERTH); Karragullen, 27 Nov. 1996, L.W. Sage 953 (PERTH);
Karragullcn, 27 Nov. 1996, L.W. Sage 954 (PERTH); Boyagin, 30 Dec. 1981, K.J. Wallace 922
(PERTH).
Distribution. Extends from east of Armadale in the Darling Range to Boyagin and north to south-west
of Northam. This areais part of the Northern Forest Region and is included in Darling Botanical District
of the South West Botanical Province of Western Australia. (Figure 1)
Habitat. G. druniiiiondii subsp. megaphylla is mostly associated with granite outcropping in the
northern Jarrah forest, but occurs in Wandoo woodland over laterite at the most northern population
south-west of Northam.
Flowering period. November to late December or early January.
Conseiyation .s tatus. Pricn-ity Three should be considered for this subspecies as there are only si x known
populations. Ol'these populations, one is under immediate threat as it occurs on a roadside and in private
property, one is in a nature reserve and the rest in State forest.
L.W. Sage, New subspecies of Goodenia drummondii and G. laevis
235
Etymology. The specific cpithel - megaphylla, alludes to the relatively large maximum leaf length of
the subspecies.
Ajfinitie.'i. Goodenia drummondii subsp. megaphylla can be distinguished from subsp. drummondii
by its entire rather than dentate leaves, longer maximum leaf length, larger corolla with longer lohes,
and larger flowering spike. It also tends to be a larger plant than subsp. drummondii. Subsp. drummondii
occurs further north, extending from Kalbarri National Park to south-east of Latham.
Discu.ssion. Goodenia drummondii is closely related to G. helmsii, differing in having longer leaves,
corol la and flowering spi ke, and no copious axillary wool . The two species appear to intergrade to some
degree, though evidence for this is restricted to only four sheets at the Western Australian Herbarium
(PERTH). G. helmsii is distributed further inland in the south-west than G. drummondii, mostly in the
wheatbclt, while the intergradation of the two species seems to be centred at Wongan Hills.
There are also collections of typical G. helmsii which have leaves longer than the 5 mm maximum
length described in the “Flora of Australia” (Carolin 1992) and hence would fail to key out correctly
there. This problem could be readily overcome by modifying couplet 7 of the key on page 152 as
follows:
7 Leaves 10-78 mm long, with little axillary wool; corolla
5. 5-8. 3 mm long G. drummondii
7: Leaves 2-5.5 mm long, with copious axillary wool; corolla
4-5.5 mm long G. helmsii
Goodenia laevis Benth., FI. Austral. 4: 61(1 868). 7y7;e. PhillipsRange, Western Australia, G. Maxwell
(lecto, here selected; K (right hand upper portion), photo PERTH).
Typification. The K sheet on which the Maxwell type is mounted has a mixed collection consisting
of two separate pieces, the upper piece being the narrow-leaved variant and the lower piece being the
broad-leaved variant of G. laevis. Bentham ( 1868; 61) in “Flora Australiensis” apparently included
both variants in his description of G. laevis, the lower piece used for the ‘lower leaves’ and the upper
piece for the ‘upper leaves’ of his sentence “Lower leaves oblong-cuneate, obtuse, with 2 or 3 coarse
teeth or lohes. narrowed into a short petiole, I to 1 l/2in. long, upperonesnarrow-linear.entireall rather
thick and smooth”, ‘riie upper right hand piece with the narrow leaves is here is selected as the lectotype
of G. laevis because it is a larger specimen.
Notes. The description of G. laevis given in Carolin (1992) apparently applies only to the new
sub.spccies as no specimens of the typical subspecies appear to have been mapped and certainly none
has been cited.
Key to the subspecies iA' Goodenia laevis
Prostrate habit; leaves narrowly to widely spathulate, the larger ones
23-43 mm long and 5-13 mm wide, sometimes with two lobes near the apex
(Ravensthorpe to Dumbleyung region) subsp. humifusa
Erect habit; leaves linear to rarely narrowly spathulate, the larger ones
15-25 mm long and 1-3 mm wide, entire (inland Esperance region) subsp. laevis
236
Nuytsia Vol. 12, No. 2 (1998)
Goodenia laevis Benlh. subsp. humifusa Sage, subsp. nov.
Habitus prostratus. Folia late spathulata vel anguste spathulata, ad 7 cm longa, 13 mm lata, interdum
versus apicem lobis 2 ornatis.
Typus: 0.5 km north ol' Hatters Hill, c. 41 km north-east of Lake King, 32“ 49' OF'S, 1 19“ 59' 00" E,
Western Australia, 13 November 1979, K.R. Newbey 6549 {holo: PERTH 02607735, iso: CANB).
A prostrate, woody subshrub, glabrous; stems to c. 50 cm long. Leaves narrowly to widely
spathulatc, 23-43 mm long, 5-13 mm wide, entire or with two lobes near the apex, apex acute to
rounded.
Other specimens examined. Near Jerdacuttup River, 11 miles [18 km] E of Ravensthorpe,
33" 26' 12" S, 120" OF 53" E, 27 Oct. 1963, T.E.H. Aplin 2688 (PERTH, CANB); 14 km E of
Ravensthorpe, 33" 36'S, 120" 10' S, 10 Jan. 1979, B. Barnsley et al. BB 467 (PERTH); Tarin Rock,
33" 07' E, 118" 14'S,29 0cl. 1962,7.5. Bca/ri 2154 (PERTH); 10 miles [16 km] E of Ravensthorpe,
33" 34' 47" S, 120“ 12' 39" E, 2 Sep. 1968, E.M. Bennett 2738 (PERTH, CANB); 20 miles [32 km] E
ofDumbleyung, 33“ 18'47"S, 1 18" 04' 22" E, 1 2 Nov. 1931, W.£. S/aci:a// 1343 (PERTH); Elverton
[Elverdton] roadside olTRavensthorpc-Esperance road, 33" 37' 35" E, 120" 08' 24" E, 29 Oct. 1988,
E.J. Crojc/or7 6239 (PERTH); Lake King, 33" 05' 30" S, 1 19" 41' 06" E, Nov. 1931, C.A. Gardner s.n.
(PERTH); N of Needilup, 33“ 57’ II" S, 11 8" 46' 30" E, 29 Oct. 1965, A.5. 7019 (PERTH);
2 km E of Lake King, 33" 05' S, 1 1 9" 4 1' E, 15 Sep. 1 993, M. Gustafsson et K. Bremer 1 34 (PERTH);
Diggers Rock, Forrestania, 32“ 43' E, 1 1 9" 50' 53" E, 9 Dec. 1 964, F. Lm///(7zL 3976 (PERTH); Bandalup
Creek, E of Ravensthorpe, 33" 36' 17" S. 120" 18' 11 "E, 6 Oct. 1966, F. 5488 (PERTH); 3 miles
[5 km] SE of Ravensthorpe, 33" 36' 38" S, 1 20" 04' 43" E, 13 Dec. 1964, K.R. Newbey 1722 (PERTH);
Frank Hann National Park, 33“ 00' 18" S, 120" 05' 30" E, 10 Dec. \91\,R.D. Royce 10235 (PERTH,
CANB); 5 km E of Ravensthorpe, 33" 34' 47" S, 1 20" 05' 43" E, 8 Oct. 1966, F.C. Wilson553l (PERTH
02889218, CANB).
Distribution. Found from Just east of Ravensthorpe, south to Jerramungup, west to Dumbleyung and
north to Digger Rocks. (Figure I)
Habitat. This subspecies can be found in loamy clay or sand, in open mallee shrublands.
Flowerinf’ period. August to early January.
Conservation .status. Goodenia laevis subsp. humifusa is common throughout its range.
Etymology. From the Latin humifusa - lying down, alluding to the prostrate habit of the subspecies.
Notes. G. laevis subsp. humifusa can readily be distinguished from subsp. laevis by its prostrate habit,
widely spathulatc to narrowly spathulatc leaves to 13 mm wide and its more western distribution in
the Ravensthorpe to Dumbleyung region of the wheatbelt of southern Western Australia.
Goodenia laevis Benth. subsp. laevis
Erect woody subshrub, glabrous; stems to 25 cm long. Leaves mostly linear, rarely narrowly
spathulatc, 15-25 mm long, 1-3 mm wide, entire, apex mostly acute, entire.
L.W. Sage, New subspecies of Goodenia druinmondii and G. laevis
237
Figure 1. Distribulioji map of Gondcnia drummondii subsp. druinmondii A , G. druinmondii subsp. me)<uphylla ▲
G. laevis subsp. ktevis O and G. laevis- subsp. humifusa ■ .
Other specimens examined [precise localities withheld). S of Ml Ney, Aug. 1 983, M.A. Burginan 1 708
(PERTH); Kumarl, Apr. 1938, L.A. Uorhury 36 (PERTH); SE of Mt Beaumont, 10 Nov. 1980,
K.R. Newbey 7996 (PERTH); N of Gib.son, 9 Nov. 1982, A. 5mV/2l263 (PERTH); Scadden, 24 Dec'
1 995, C.D. Turley 1 0/ 1 295 (PERTH); E of Scadden, 2 Dec. 1 982, P. van der MoezelPGY242 (PERTH).
Distribution. Occurs inland from Esperance to Scadden siding and Mt Ney. (Figure 1)
Habitat. Found in well drained sandy loam or laterite.
238
Nuytsia Vol, 12, No. 2 (1998)
Flowering period. August to December, with one occurrence in April.
Consen’ation status. Goodenia laevis subsp, laevis is known from only six populations, two possibly
in a reserve, therefore a Priority Three for poorly known taxa should be considered for this subspecies.
Acknowledgements
I am grateful to Paul G. Wilson for the Latin diagnosis and nomenclatural guidance, Carol Wilkins,
Ray Cranfield, Patrick Pigott, John Timmer and Barbara Rye for for their much appreciated help.
References
Carolin, R.C. (1992). Goodenia. In: George, A.S. (ed.) “Flora of Australia.” Vol. 35. pp. 147-281. (Australian
Government Publi.shing Service: Canberra.)
Bentham, G. (1868). Goodenia. In: “Flora Auslraliensis.” Vol. 4. pp. 50-80. (L. Reeve & Co.: London.)
Nuytsia 1 2(2):239-265( 1998)
239
A taxonomic review of the genera Eriostemon and Philotheca
(Rutaceae: Boronieae)
Paul G. Wilson
Western Australian Herbarium, Department of Conservation and Land Management,
Looked Bag 104, Bentley Delivery Centre, Western Australia 6983
Abstract
Wilson, Paul G. A taxonomic review of the genera Eriostemon and Philotheca (Rutaceae:
Boronieae). Nuytsia 12 (2): 239-265 (1998). The circumscription of the genera Eriostemon and
Philotheca (Rutaceae: Boronieae) is reviewed with the majority of the species of the former genus
being transferred to Philotheca. Five species arc described as new, namely P. acrolopha Paul G. Wilson,
P. coateana, P. cuticularis, P. eremicola, and P. kalbarriensis. Five new subspecies are described,
namely P. buxifolia subsp. falcata, P. deserti subsp. brevifolius, P. gardneri subsp. globosa,
P. nodiflora subsp. latericola, and P. salsolifolia subsp. pedicellata. The following three new sectional
combinations are made: Philotheca sect. Corynonema (Paul G. Wilson) Paul G. Wilson, Philotheca
sect. Cyanochlamys (F. Muell.) Paul G. Wilson, and Philotheca sect. Erionema (F. Muell.)
Paul G. Wilson. Thirty-three new species combinations and eight new subspecies combinations are
made, these having been transferred from Eriostemon.
Introduction
Since Bentham’s (1863) treatment of the genus, Eriostemon (Rutaceae: Boronieae) has been
distinguished from the apparently closely related genus Philotheca by its free rather than united
stamens. Wilson (1970) retained this circumscription although he pointed out that Philotheca was
more closely related to Eriostemon scci. Nigro.stipulae than that section was to the otb&xs 'm Eriostemon.
Smith- White (1954) indicated that this broad circumscription of Eriostemon is incorrect and that
the genus should be recognized as consisting of only the one or two species that are placed in
Eriostemon sect. Eriostemon. This suggestion is here accepted.
Armstrong (1991) examined the question of generic relationships in the tribe Boronieae but he has
yet to publish on this matter. Basically, his preliminary conclusion was that Eriostemon sect.
Eriostemon is the sister taxon to the genus Crowea Sm. and that these together form the sister taxon
to the remainder of the sections in Eriostemon and Philotheca (but excluding E. deserti).
Michael Bayly, formerly of Melbourne University, has studied the relationships within the genus
Eriostemon s.lat. but has yet to publish on this matter. He has also a particular interest in the Eriostemon
240
Nuytsia Vol. 12, No. 2 (1998)
myoporoides complex in sect. Erionema which will be the subject of a separate paper by him. For this
reason E. myoporoides is omitted from this revision.
The New Caledonian species, Eriostemon pallidas Schltr., was excluded from the genus by Wilson
(1970) who based his decision solely on his interpretation of the protologue provided by Schlechter.
However, herbarium material has since been examined and it is clear that this species is representative
of a taxon quite distinct from ckhcr Eriostemon or Philotheca. The flowers have very thick induplicate
valvate petals which have only one vascular strand (imbricate with c. 5 strands in Eriostemon), while
the seed lacks both a sclcrotesta and a circular chalazal aperture (characters that are found in all
Australian and New Zealand members of the tribe Boronieae but which have not been observed
elsewhere). Hartley (1995) implied thatfi. pa/hTfmv possessed a linear embryo similar to that found in
the Australian members of the Boronieae, however, he now considers (Hartley 1 996, pers. comm.) that
this conclusion was based on the examination of immature seeds. The examination of more mature
seeds suggests that they have Battened elliptic cotyledons which are considerably wider than the
hypocotyl; this implies that E. pallidas is part of the lineage comprising Boronellas Baill., Myrtopsis
Engl., Euodia J.R. & G. Forst, Brombya F. Muell., and Medicosma Hook, f., which suggestion is
supported by the seed morphology. The chromosome number of £. pallidas has been determined as
n=20 (Guerra 1984) whereas for Eriostemon s. str. it is n=l7, and for Philotheca in the sense here
accepted it is n=l4, 28 (Smith-White 1954).
The generic circumscription of Philotheca is still not satisfactorily resolved. I have here delineated
it in a broad sense so as to include the sections formerly placed in Eriostemon, other than sect.
Eriostemon, although, as is explained in the notes under Philotheca sect. Philotheca, this would appear
to render Philotheca paraphylctic with reference to Geleznowia Turez.
Morphology
In discriminating the generic and infrageneric taxa within the Eriostemon group attention has been
given to two morphological characters that have not previously been included in its description and
therefore require explanation. These are as follows.
Foliar sclereids (terminology following Rao 1991). The idioblasts present in leaves of a range of
species in all members of the Boronieae were examined. In most of the taxa investigated tracheoids
were present. Sclereids were confirmed in a number of species of Boronia whose presence has been
documented by Rao & Bhattacharya (1978, 1981).
In \\\c Eriostemon group tracheoids associated with vein-endings were found to be widespread. The
only sclereids observed in the genus, in the broad sense, were the filiform type (Figure I A). These were
found in all species of Philotheca and in each of the 10 species examined of Eriostemon sect.
Nigrostipulae except for E. linearis in which neither sclereids nor tracheoids were observed. This
filiform type of sclereid was also found in Geleznowia verrucosa Turez. but in none of the other taxa
of the Boronieae.
Petal venation. All members of the tribe Boronieae subtribe Eriostemoninae possess only one central
nerve (Figure I C) except for the two species Eriostemon sect. Eriostemon in which about five parallel
nerves are found (Figure IB). Petals with three to five nerves are also found in most members of Boronia
sect. Boronia and in the New Caledonian genus Boronella hut not elsewhere in the Boronieae.
Paul G. Wilson, A taxonomic review of the geneva Erioslemon and Philolheca
241
Figure 1 . A - sclereids (x200) from leaf of Philotheca deserti subsp. deserli; B — petal of Eriostemon australasius showing
venation (x4); C - petal of Philotheca verrucosa showing venation (x8).
Key to genera in the Eriostemon complex
I Petals valvate, thick, covered with basally branched silky hairs; seeds
with pale brown thin weak inner testa, without a circular chalazal opening;
embryo with flattened elliptic cotyledons (New Caledonia; n=20) Eriostemon pallidus
1 : Petals imbricate, ± papery, glabrous or with stellate or simple hairs;
seeds with black thick brittle inner testa, with a supra-basal circular chalazal
opening; embryo with terete cotyledons
2 Petals inultincrved, stellate-lepidote; staminal filaments with a subapical
adaxial and abaxial verrucosity; anther apiculum absent or glabrous;
(Eastern Australia; n=l7) Eriostemon
2: Petals I -nerved; glabrous or with simple hairs; staminal filaments smooth;
anther apiculum glabrous or pilose
3 Anther and apiculum glabrous (Southern and eastern Australia; n=14, 28) Philotheca
3: Anther and apiculum pilose (South-west and eastern Australia; n=19) Crowea
Eriostemon
Eriostemon Sm., Erans. Linn. Soc. 4: 22 1 ( 1 798). Type: Eriostemon australasius Pers. ( 1 805), lectotype,
see Wilson (1970) and below.
Critical features. Leaves with tracheoids. Petals stellate-lepidote, with c. 5 parallel nerves. Staminal
filaments wkh adaxial verrucosity near apex and an opposite abaxial hump; anther with a rounded apex
or with a white non-glandular apiculum. Seed reniform; adaxial face concave; outer testa coriaceous,
crinkled and glossy; sclcrotcsta smooth; hilum elliptic in centre of adaxial face; raphe in centre of
242
Nuytsia Vol. 12, No. 2 (1998)
adaxial face beneath a thick crustaceous cover; chalazal opening at base of raphe and beneath
crustaceous cover; placental endocarp thick, persistent. (Figures IB, 2A-C)
Chromosome number. n=17 in E. aiistralasius (Smith-White 1954).
Notes. The protologue of Erio.s'temoii gave the locality of the genus as Australasia (i.e. Australia). Smith
did not indicate which Australian species were to be included in the genus but did state that Diosma
uniflora L. (a South African species) helonged here even though it differed from Eriostemon in having
five of its stainens sterile. The first Australian species described in the genus was E. australasius Pers.
and, judging from Smith’s protologue and from his herbarium, it was on material of this species that
he based the generic description.
Abrief nomenclatural history of the genus is given in Wilson (1970) where £. australasius is sX^Acd
to be the type, whereas in Farr etal. ( 1979) the type is given as ‘£. lanceolatus K.F. Gaertner (1805)’.
The date cited for the latter name is incorrect, it should be 1 807, and the name is simply an illegitimate
nom. nov. (or E. au.stralusius Vors.
Two species are now recognized in the genus (Bay ly et al. 1 998) and these are endemic to near the
east coast of Australia. The solitary species of Eriostemon recorded from New Caledonia (E. pallidus
R. Schlechter, nom. illeg.) clearly belongs to its own monotypic genus (see above).
Eriostemon australasius Pers., Syn. Plant. 1: 465 (1805). Type: not seen.
Note. See Wilson (1970) for synonymy.
Eriostemon banksii A. Cunn. ex Endl. in Endl. et al., Enum. PI. Huegel 15 (1837). - E. amstralasius
subsp. banksii (A. Cunn. ex Endl.) Paul G. Wilson, Nuytsia 1: 24 (1970). Type: Endeavour River,
Queensland, July 1819, /4. Cunningham (iso: CANB, K).
Notes. This taxon was made a subspecies of £ australasius by Wilson (1970) who, due to the ab.sence
of (lowering material, thought that the two species differed only in leaf shape. Recent collections have
shown that in (lower, fruit and leaf characters they arc distinct (see Bayly et al. 1 988). In E. banksii
the petals are white, the anthers have no white apieulum and the cocci have a distinct beak, whereas
in E. aiLstralasius the petals are pink, the anthers have a white apieulum and the cocci are erostratc.
In addition, the leaves of E. banksii are distinctly 5-nerved, while in E. australasius they are 3-nervcd,
even in broadly leaved variants. The areas of distribution of the two species do not overlap.
Pliilotheca
Philotheca Rudge, Trans. Linn. Soc. Botany 1 1 : 298 (1816). Type: F. australis Rudge \-P. salsolifolia
(Sm.)Druce].
Critical features. Leaves with filiform sclereids or non-filiform tracheoids, frequently, in sect.
Philotheca, with a pair of small dark-coloured stipular excrescences. PefaB glabrous or sparsely pilose,
1 -nerved. Staminal filaments terete or iinear-acuminale, smooth throughout; anther with a white
apieulum. Seed reniform; adaxial face concave; outer testa coriaceous or membranous; sclerotesta
Paul G. Wilson, A taxonomic review of the genera Eriasieinon and Philolheca
243
smooth or rugose; hilum elliptic to linear in centre of adaxial face; raphe variable; chalazal opening
at base of raphe; placental cndocarp thick and persistent or membranous and deciduous.
A genus of 45 species endemic to Australia. They are divided into four sections.
Philotheca Rudge Sect. 1 . Philotheca
Philotheca Rudge sect. Philolheca
Eriosteinon sect. Nigroslipiilae Paul G. Wilson, Nuytsia 1 : 25 (1 970). Type: E. dijformis A. Cunn. ex
Endl. 1= P. dijformis (A. Cunn. ex End].) Paul G. Wilson],
Eriosteinon sect. Gymnanthos Paul G. Wilson, Nuytsia 1 : 59 ( 1 970). Type: E. desertiE. Pritz. [= P. deserti
(E. Pritz.) Paul G. Wilson].
Critical features. Leaves with I'iliform sclereids (sclereids absent in P. linearis). Petals glabrous or
with simple hairs, I -nerved. Staminal filaments slender, flattened, smooth; anthers with a white non-
glandular apiculum. reniform; adaxial face concave; outer testa thin, smooth, glossy; sclerotesta
smooth; hilum delta-shaped, in centre of adaxial face; raphe in centre of adaxial face beneath a thin
crustaccous cover or this crustaceous cover ab.sent; chalazal opening at base of raphe and beneath
cover; placental cndocarp thick, persistent. (Figures lA, 2D-I)
Chromosome nuniher. n=l4 in P. reiclienbachii and P. salsoUfolia (Smith-White 1954), and
P. tuhiflora (Keighery 1978); n=28 in P. /j/'evi/b/ia (Smith-White 1954).
Notes. A section of 3 1 species in southern and eastern Australia. The genus Philotheca has
previously been separated from Eriosteinon sect. Nigrostipulae solely on the presence of united
staminal filaments, however, this is a character of little moment since a gradation from free to united
filaments can be found within sect. Philotheca.
Filiform sclereids (Figure I A) of the type present in Philotheca sect. Philotheca (with apparently
the sole exception of P. lineari.s), also occur in Geleznowia which genus possesses a similar seed and
the same chromosome number. Geleznowia has, however, a rctuse anther that lacks an apiculum. The
morphological similarity otherwise suggests a close relationship between the two genera and therefore
it is possible that the inclusion of the three non-typical sections in Philotheca renders the genus
paraphylctic.
Philotheca acrolopha Paul G. Wilson, .sp. nov.
Frutex densus ad I m altus. Ramuli ascendentes, in lincis latis puberuli inter decurentias glabras.
Folia congesta; lamina angustc cuneata, 7-13 mm longa, ad apice obcordata minute glandulariter
apiculala, basi attentuata in petiolo brevi, tenuiter coriacea, glabra, laevis, margo recurvo. Stipula
resinosa. c. 0.3 mm longa. Flores terminales, solitarii; pedicellus c. 2.5 mm longus, glaber. Sepala
orbiculares, c. 1 .5 mm longa, coriacea. Petala anguste ovata, c. 5 m longa, subcoriacea, intra sparse
puberula, extra marginem versus sparse puberula. Filamenta staminum anguste oblongo-attenuata, ad
basim adnata ct ad peialas connata, pilosa; apiculum antherorum minutum, rubellum.
244
Nuytsia Vol. 12, No. 2 (1998)
Figure 2. A-C .Seed of Er'uislemon tiiixlnikisius (.kIO) Iroiii C Dunn & T. James 580 (NSW). A - lateral view;
B - view of ada.xial surface; C - loiigiliidinal radial section, D-F. Seed of Philalheca deserti subsp. deserti fx20) from
Paul G. Wilson 1.^076 (PFKTIl). I) - lateral view, placental cndocarp present; E - view of aduxial surface, placental
endocarp removed; F longtttiditial radial section. G-1, Seed of Pliilolheca diffonnis seed (xlO) from Adelaide Botanic
Garden, 1965. G - lateral view; II - view of adaxial surface; I - lotigitudinal radial sectioti.
Paul G. Wilson, A taxonomic reviewof thegenera Erioslemonand Phihtheca
245
Typus: Summit of Mt Tozer, Queensland, 28 July 1986, K. Hill 1 839, P. Hind & D. Healey {halo: BRI
ex NSW).
Dense shrub to 1 m high. Branchlets ascending, reddish when young, pubcrulous in broad lines
between glabrous leaf-dccurrcnces. Leaves congested; lamina cuneate, apex obcordate and minutely
glandular-apiculate, base attenuate to a short petiole, in all 7-13 mm long, 3-6 mm wide, thinly
coriaceous, recurved on margin, glabrous, smooth. Stipules c. 0.3 mm long, resinous. F/oweri' terminal,
solitary; mature bud narrowly ovoid; pedicel c. 2.5 mm long, glabrous, lleshy. Sepals orbicular,
c. 1 .5 mm long, coriaceous, glabrous, /-’em/.r narrowly ovate, c. 5 mm long, firm, subcoriaceous, sparsely
puberulous within and towards margin outside, white to very pale pink; keel thickened. Staminal
filaments narrowly oblong-attenuate, at their bases united to each other and to the petals, pilose; anthers
suborbicular, c. 0.6 mm long with a minute reddish apiculum. Disc continuous with ovary. Carpels
glabrous; style terete, pilose in lower half; stigma small, capitate. Cocci (immature) with a small
rounded apiculum. Seed not seen. (Figure 3)
Figure 3. Philotlieca acrolopha. A ~ biaiicli (x0,8); B - leaf showing gland-like stipules (x6); C - flower (xO.7);
D - pctalinc stamen, abaxial view (x2); F - pistil and disc (x2). From P i Forster 15433 (BRI).
246
Nuytsia Vol. 12, No. 2 (1998)
Additional specimens examined. QUEENSLAND: MtTozer, P. Foster A1 (BRI); ibid., M.B. Thomas
302 (BRI); ibid., L.J. Brass 19483 (CANB).
Distribution. Known only from Mt Tozer, Cape York Peninsula, Queensland.
Habitat. Growing on granite near the mountain summit in heathland.
Etymology. The epithet is derived from the Greek words acros - summit, and lophos - crest, and has
reference to the habitat of the plant.
Notes. This species has leaves that are dilTerent in shape from those of any other member of the genus,
however, in floral morphology and in the possession of filiform sclereids it is typical of sect. Philotheca.
It is also the most northerly representative of the genus.
Philotheca angustifolia (Paul G. Wilson) Paul G. Wilson, comb. nov.
Eriostemon angustifolius Paul G. Wilson, Nuytsia 1:31 (1970). Type: Near Finnis River, South
Australia, 25 August 1963, D.N. Kraehenbuehl 906 {liolo: AD 964151 13).
a. Philotheca angustifolia (Paul G. Wilson) Paul G. Wilson subsp. angustifolia
b. Philotheca angustifolia subsp. montana (Paul G. Wilson) Paul G. Wilson, comb. nov.
Eriostemon angustifolius subsp. montaniis Paul G. Wilson, Nuytsia 1: 32 (1970). Type: North-west
slopes of Mt Difficult, Victoria, 12 October 1962, TB. Muir 2647 (holo: MEL 4057; iso: CANB).
Philotheca apiculata (Paul G. Wilson) Paul G. Wilson, comb. nov.
Eriostemon apiculatus Paul G. Wilson, Nuytsia I; 35 (1970). Type: Norseman, Western Australia,
17 September 1965,7, Bale 185 {holo: PERTH 01615440).
Notes. This species in its typical form occurs in southern Western Australia near Norseman where it
grows on ultra basic rocks. Recently a collection was made c. 180 km south-east of Norseman at Mt
Buraminya. This collection differs from the specimens of the Norseman area in having leaves that are
prominently channelled above (not smooth) and .sepals that are less than I mm long (not 1 .5-2 mm);
further study may indicate that it should be recognized as a distinct taxon.
Philotheca basistyla Mollemans, Nuytsia 9:101(1 993). Type: south-south-east of Trayning, Western
Australia, 25 August 1991, F.ll. & M.P. Mollemans 4\26 {holo: PERTH 01615440).
Philotheca brevifolia (Endl.) Paul G. Wilson, comb. nov.
Eriostemon brevifolius A. Cunn. exEndl. in Endl. era/., Enum. PI. Huegel 16(1 837). Type: Peels Range
[Cocoparra Range], New South Wales, June 1817, A. Cunningham 162 {iso: K).
E. diff'ormis var. teretifolius Benth., FI. Austral. 1 : 335 ( 1 863). Type: Peels Range [Cocoparra Range],
New South Wales, June 1817, A. Cunningham 162 {lecto: K) fide Wilson, Nuytsia 1:31 (1970).
Paul G, Wilson, A taxonomic review of the genera CrifAvtemwi and
247
Notes. The name E. diffonnis var. teretifolius Benlh. was stated by Wilson (1970) to be based on
E. brevifolius Endl. However, Bcntham cited several collections in addition to the type of that species
and therefore Wilson’s statement should be taken as a lectotypification.
Philotheca dliata Hook, in T.L. Mitch., J. Exped. Int. Trop. Australia 347 ( 1 848). - P. australis var.
parv(//ora Benth., FI. Austral. 1:348 (1863). Type.- Mount Faraday, Queensland, 10 October 1846,
Stephenson & T.L. Mitchell {.syn: K [Mitchell 392,395, photo seen), MEL (Mitchell s.n.), TCD
[Mitchell s.n.)).
Philotheca citrina Paul G. Wilson, Nuytsia 8: 247 ( 1 992). Type: Curbur Station, Western Australia,
30 August 1989, R.C. Cranfield 7665 & S. Patrick (holo: PERTH 1461 192).
Philotheca coateaiia Paul G. Wilson, sp. nov.
Frutex ad 50 cm altus. Ramuli laeves, griseo-viridi, glabri. Folia exstipulata; lamina ellipsoidea,
3-4 mm longa, giseo-virida, obtusa, glabra, supra applanala. Flores terminales, solitarii; pedicellus
1-3 mm longus,glaber. Sepalalate-lriangularia, c. 3 mm longa, glabra. Petalaelliptica,7-9mm longa,
intraspar.se puberula, extra glabra, alba, costa pallido-rubra. Filamenta staminalia libra, lanato-ciliata;
anthera minute albo-apiculata.
Typiis: 20 km south of Bulga Downs Station boundary. Western Australia, 3 August 1993, K.H. Coate
292 [holo: PERTH 03281973).
Shrub to 50 cm high. Rranrhlets smooth, greyish green, glabrous. Leaves exstipulate; lamina
ellipsoid, 3-4 mm long, dull greyish green. Battened above, obtuse, glandular-punctate, glabrous.
Flowers terminal, solitary; pedicel 1-3 mm long, glabrous. Sepals broadly triangular, c. 3 mm long,
smooth, ghibroLis. Petals elliptic, 7-9 mm long, sparsely puberulous within, glabrous outside, white
with pink midrib. Staminal filaments free, linear-attenuate, woolly ciliate; anther c. 1.5 mm long,
minutely white-apiculate. Style terete, glabrous. Cocci truncate, with a slender apiculum c. 1 .5 mm
long.
Additional specimens e.uunined. WESTERN AUSTRALIA: Boundary of Perrin vale and Walling Rock
Stations, R.J. Cranfieldl \ 69 (CANB, PERTH); nearMenzies, Sep. 1 927, C.A. Gardner ik W.E. Blackall
(PERTH); 1 8 miles [29 km] W of Old Gidgee, R.D. Royce 10457 (PERTH).
Distribution. Found near Menzies in the Austin Botanical District of Western Australia.
Consen’ation status. Known from a few collections over an area of 300 km. CALM Conservation Code
for Western Australian Florti: Priority Three.
Etymology. Named after the naturalist Kevin Coate who drew my attention to this species.
Note. This species is similar to P. eremicola, q.v.
Philotheca cocciiiea (C.A. Gardner) Paul G, Wilson, comb. nov.
Eriostemon coccincusC .A. Gaixlner, Hooker’ sicon. PI. 34: t. 3378 ( 1 939). Type: NearKoorarawalyee,
Western Australia. October 1931. W.E. Blackall 9^6 [holo: PERTH 01615483).
248
Nuytsia Vol. 12, No. 2 (1998)
Philotheca cuticularis Paul G. Wilson, sp. nov.
Frutex rotundatus ad 60 cm altus. Ramuli glanduloso-verrucosi, sparse puberuli; cuticula mox
secedens, tunicam formans. Folia congesta, minutissime stipulata vel exstipulata; lamina carnosa,
subteretia, 1 .5-2 mm longa, glanduloso verrucosa, glabra, supra applanata, apice obtusa vel rotundata.
Flores terminales, solitarii; pedicellus carnosus, 0.5-1 mm longus, sparse puberulus. Sepala glabra,
amplitudine admodum variabilia, triangularia c. 1 mm longa vel semiteretia obtusa foliacea c. 2 mm
longa. Petala elliptica, c. 2.5 mm longa, alba, intra puberula, extra glabra. Stamina libra; filamenta
lineari-attenuata, ciliata; anthera minute albo-apiculata.
Typus: Grey-Go wan Ranges, Queensland, 9 April 1984, R. W. Purdie 2075 {holo: CBG; iso: BRI «. v.).
Rounded shrub to 60 cm high. Brancblets glandular-verrucose, sparsely puberulous when young;
cuticle soon separating as a membranous pale tunic; corky eruptions not forming. Leaves crowded,
extremely minutely stipulate when young or exstipulate; petiole 0.3 mm long; lamina fleshy, subtercte,
1 .5-2 mm long, glandular-verrucose, glabrous, somewhat flattened above; apex obtuse to rounded.
F/oweri- terminal, solitary. Pedicel fleshy, 0.5-1 mm long, very sparsely puberulous. glabrous,
irregular in size and shape, from triangular and very fleshy with .scarious margins c. 1 mm long, to
semiterete, obtuse, foliaceous and c. 2 mm long. elliptic, c. 2.5 mm long, white, glabrous outside,
puberulous within. Stamens free; filaments linear-attenuate, ciliate; anthers orbicular, minutely white-
apiculate. Ovary sparsely pilose; style short, glabrous.
Additional specimen examined. QUEENSLAND: 33 miles [53 km] E of Adavale, 16 Sep. 1967,
L. Pedley 2502 (CBG).
Distribution. Found in the Gowan Range area of southern Queensland and possibly in north-west New
South Wales (see below).
Etymology. The specific epithet is Latin for cuticular, and refers to the cuticle which soon separates
as a grey membrane.
Habitat. Growing in shallow soil overlying laterite.
Notes. This species is unusual in having sepals that vary in size on the same flower, and that range in
shape from triangular to semiterete and leaf-like.
A vegetative collection from Koonenberry Mountain, New South Wales, 17 August 1883,
P.H. MacGillivray 965 (NSW 69047), appears to belong to this species.
Philotheca cymbiformis (Paul G. Wilson) Paul G. Wilson, comb. nov.
Eriostemon cymbiformis Paul G. Wilson, Nuytsia 1: 205 (1971). Type: Fitzgerald River Reserve,
Western Australia, 7 October 1970, Paul G. Wilson 10176 {holo: PERTH 01066293).
Philotheca deserti (E. Pritz.) Paul G. Wilson, comb. nov.
Eriostemon deserti E. Pritz. in Diels & E. Pritz., Sot. Jahrb. Syst. 35:320, tab. 39 A-C ( 1 904); Phebalium
t/ei'erh' (E. Pritz. )Ewart& B. Rees, Proc. /toy. Sue. Wetonaser. 2, 25: 1 11(1912). Type.' Ghooli, Western
Australia, October 1901 , E. Pritzel 868 {iso: AD 96350140, K, MEL 4674, NSW 69249).
Paul G. Wilson, A taxonomic review of the genera Eriostemon and Philotheca
249
Notes. This species was placed in its own section of Eriostemon by Wilson (1970) who considered that
it was not closely related to any other section of either Eriostemon or of Phebalium. This uncertainty
was due to the presence of a broad disc and of glabrous spreading stamens. Further study has shown
that its seed is typical of that found in Philotheca sect. Philotheca and that it possesses abundant
filiform foliar sclereids which are also typical of that section. The chromosome number is unknown.
Two subspecies are recognized.
Leaves subulate. 2-3 cm long subsp. desert!
Leaves fusiform to narrowly obovoid, 3-5 mm long subsp. brevifolia
a. Philotheca desert! (E. Fritz.) Paul G. Wilson subsp. desert!
Eriostemon intermedius Ewart nom. illeg., Proc. Roy. Soc. Victoria ser 2, 19: 40 (1907), non Hook.
(1849). Type: Cowcowing, Western Australia, August 1904, M. Koch 1 168 {syn: MEL 4541, 4543);
between the sources of the Blackwood River and Lake Lefroy, Western Australia, 1893, M. Cronin
{syn: MEL 4542).
b. Philotheca desert! subsp. brevifolia Paul G. Wilson, subsp. nov.
Folia breviter petiolata; lamina fusiformis vel anguste obovoidea, 3-5 mmlonga, acuta vel obtusa,
supra laevis et applanata, infra rotundata.
Typus: Walling Rock Station, Western Australia, 9 September 1 988, R.J. Cranfieldl25^ {holo: PERTH
0225 1191; iso: CANB, K, MEL).
Leaves shortly petiolate; lamina fusiform to narrowly obovoid, 3-5 mm long, smooth and somewhat
flattened above, rounded below, acute to obtuse. (Figure 4)
Specimens examined. Only known from the type collection.
Distribution. Occurs in central southern Western Australia, c. 70 km north-west of Menzies.
Habitat. Found growing on red sandy clay.
Conservation status. Although only known from one locality on unreserved land, it does not appear
to be under immediate threat. CALM Conservation Code for Western Australian Flora: Priority One.
Etymology. The varietal epithet is a Latin word meaning short-leaved.
Notes. This subspecies appears to differ from the typical only in the size and shape of the leaves. It
is found about 100 km north-east of the nearest recorded population of subsp. deserti.
Philotheca difformis (A. Cunn. ex Endl.) Paul G. Wilson, comb. nov.
Eriostemon difformis A. Cunn. ex Endl. in Endl. cf a/., Enum. PI. Huegel 15(1 837). Type: Lachlan River,
New South Wales, 24 May 1 8 17, A. Cunningham 163 (iso: K).
250
Nuytsia Vol. 12, No. 2 (1998)
From R.J Cniiifield 7258 (I’liKTH).
PaulG.Wilson, A taxonomic review of the genera £'nV).vtemr)nandf’/j(7o(/!«'a
251
a. Philotheca difformis (Endl.) Paul G. Wilson subsp. difformis
E. rhombeus Lindl. in T. Mitch., J. Trop. Australia 293 ( 1 848). Type: Mantuan Downs [= Drummond
Range], Queensland, 1 September 1 846, T.L. Mitchell 590 [holo: CGE; iso: TCD).
b. Philotheca difformis subsp. smithiana (Benth.) Paul G. Wilson, comb. nov.
Eriostemon difformis subsp. smithianus (Benth.) Paul G. Wilson, Nuytsia 1 : 30 (1 970), - E. difformis
var. .«nt7/7;tn7M.s' Benth., FI. Austral, I: 335 (1863). Type: Wide Bay, Queensland, W. Hill {lecto: MEL
4094) /(r/c Wilson, loc. cit.
E. parvifnliusR. Br. ex Benth., FI. Austral. 1 : 335 (1863). Type.- Shoalwater Bay, Queensland, 26 August
1802, R. Brown {holo: K; iso: CANB, MEL 4018).
Philotheca eremicola Paul G. Wilson, sp. nov.
Ex alTinitae P. coateanae I'oliiscongestis, anguste fusiformis, acutis c. 2.5 mm longisglabris nitidis,
pcdicellis tenuibus c. 4 mm longis, sepalis ovatis vel anguste triangularibus acutis vel acuminatis
glandulis bruneis ornatis differt.
Typus: 5 km south-east of Tjirrkarli Outstation (Blyth Pool), Gibson Desert, Western Australia,
19 September 1992, D.J. Pear.son 2875 (holo: PERTH 03080048).
Distribution. (3nly known from the type locality in the Gibson Desert, Western Australia.
Habitat. Growing in Acacia aneura shrubland on rocky slopes of red skeletal laterite.
Conservation status. Only known from one locality on unreserved land, but does not appear to be under
threat. CALM Conservation Code for Western Australian Flora: Priority One.
Etymology . The epithet is derived from the Latin words eremus - a desert, and incola - a dweller.
Notes. This species is similartoP. coateana from which itdiffers as follows: leaves congested, narrowly
fusiform, acute, c. 2.5 mm long, glabrous, glossy; pedicels slender, c. 4 mm long; sepals ovate to
narrowly triangular, acute to acuminate, with prominent brown glands.
Philotheca ericifolia (A. Cunn. ex Benth.) Paul G. Wilson, comb. nov.
Eriostemon ericifolius A. Cunn. ex Benth., FI. Austral. 1 : 335 ( 1 863). Type: Liverpool Plains, New
South Wales, May 1825, A. Cunningham 13 (holo: K).
Philotheca falcata (Paul G. Wilson) Paul G. Wilson, comb. nov.
Eriostemon falcatus Paul G. Wilson, Nuytsia 1:11 (1970). Type: Yellowdine, Western Australia,
October 1931, W.E. Blackall9\l (holo: PERTH 01 174053).
252
Nuyt.sia Vol. 12, No. 2 (1998)
Philotheca gardneri (Paul G. Wilson) Paul G. Wilson, comb. nov.
Eriostemon gardneri Paul G. Wilson, Niiytsia 1 : 33 (1970). Type: Jerramungup, Western Australia,
September 1939, C.A. Gardner 5006 (holo: PERTH 01615556).
a. Philotheca gardneri (Paul G. Wilson) Paul G. Wilson subsp. gardneri
h. Philotheca gardneri subsp. globosa Paul G. Wilson, subsp. nov.
Philothecae gardnero subsp. gardnero affinis, a qua imprimis differ! folliis globularibus,
1.5-2 mm longis, carnosis.
Typus: 1 1 km west-south-west of Dog Rock, Western Australia, 21 September 1979, J. Taylor 723
{holo: CBG; iso: PERTH 03514536).
Rounded shrub to 30 cm high. Branchlets glabrous beneath leaves, otherwise puberulous. Stipular
excrescences prominent, reddish brown. Leaves glabrous; petiole c. 0.5 mm long; lamina globular,
1 .5-2 mm long, fleshy; apex rounded. Flowers terminal, solitary; pedicel c. 1 .5 mm long, puberulous.
Sepals ovate, c. 1 .5 mm long, very fleshy with a narrow scarious margin, ciliate, otherwise glabrous.
Petals ovate, c. 6 mm long, white, glabrous outside, puberulous within. Stamens free; filaments linear-
attenuate, woolly-cil iate; anthers c. 0.8 mm long, apiculum 0.3- 1 .0 mm long, white. Ovary puberulous
towards apex; style short, glabrous. Fruit not seen.
Specimens examined. WESTERN AUSTRALIA: 22.5 km ENE of Coujinup Hill, M.A. Burgman 1 535
(PERTH); 40 km ENE of Muckinwobert Rock, M.A.Burgman 2190a (PERTH); 39 km SSW of Peak
Eleanora, M.A. Burgman 1928a (PERTH).
Distribution. Known from a small area between Ravensthorpe and Norseman in southern Western
Australia.
Habitat. Growing on sand in heathland.
Etymology. The specific epithet refers to the shape of the leaves.
Notes. This subspecies is distinctive because of the shape and size of its leaves which in the typical
subspecies are narrowly clavale and 5-8 mm long.
Philotheca glabra (Paul G. Wilson) Paul G. Wilson, comb. nov.
Erio.'itemon glaber Paul G. Wilson, Nuytsia I: 35 (1970). Type: Cowcowing, Western Australia,
September 1904, M. Koch 1020 {holo: NSW; iso: PERTH 01615564).
Philotheca kalbarriensis Paul G. Wilson, sp. nov.
Philothecae wonganensi affinis sed foliis fusiformis, staminum filamentis ciliatis, disco angustiore
differ!.
Paul G. Wilson, A taxonomic review of the genera friav/t-mon and Philotheca
253
Typus: Kalbarri National Park, Western Australia, 4 August 1996, G.J. Keighery & N. Gibson 2034
(/ro/o; PERTH 04629817).
Shrub to 1 in; branehlets ascending, reddish brown except for short green leaf decurrencies, sparsely
puberulous when young otherwise glabrous. Leaves ascending, crowded, narrowly fusiform, c. 4 mm
long, ilatlened and sulcalc above, rounded below and sparsely glandular-bullate. Flowers axillary,
solitary; pedicel 1-2 mm long. Sepals deltate, c. 0.7 mm long, lleshy, glabrous. Petals ovate, obtuse,
c.'ixl mm, glabrous, white. Stamens free; filaments linear, moderately ciliate; anthers suborbicular,
c. 0.5 mm long with a prominent rounded white apiculum c. 0.2 mm long. Disc narrow, glabrous. Ovary
glabrous; style terete, glabrous, c. 0.5 mm long; stigma capitate.
Additional specimen examined. WESTERN AUSTRALIA: 320 miles [c. 5 1 0 km] S of Carnarvon on
Geraldton road, /. Olsen 575 (PERTH).
Distribution. Only known for certainty from Kalbarri National Park, c. 120 km north of Geraldton,
Western Australia.
Habitat. Acacia acuminata scrub over mixed heath.
Etymology. The specific epithet refers to the Kalbarri National Park within whose boundaries the type,
and possibly also the paratype, were collected.
Consen’ation status. The only locality where this is known to occur is in a national park. CALM
Conservation Code for Western Australian Flora: Priority Two.
Notes. This species differs most noticeably from P. wonganensis, to which it is most closely allied, in
leaf shape, in having ciliate staminal filaments, and in having a narrow disc.
Philotheca langei Mollcinans, Nuytsia 9: 98 (1993). Type: North-west of Chiddarcooping Hill,
Western Australia, 25 August 1991, F.H. & M.P. Mollemans 4\21 (holo: PERTH 2005360).
Philotheca linearis (A. Cunn. ex Endl.) Paul G. Wilson, comb. nov.
Erio.stemon linearis A. Cunn. ex Endl. in Endl. etal., Enum. PI. Huegel 16 (1837) Type: Barren ranges
on the Lachlan River, New South Wales, 22 June 1817, 4. Cunningham (liso: K ‘Peels Range, June
1 8 1 7, A. Cunningham 161’).
E. halmaturorum F. Muell., Linnaea 25: 376 (1853). Type: Elders Range, South Australia, October
1851, F. Mueller (holo: MEL 402 1 ).
Philotheca nutans (Paul G. Wilson) Paul G. Wilson, comb. nov.
Eriostemon nutans Paul G. WUson, Nuytsia 1:28(1 970). Type: Ninghan, Western Australia, 17 August
1953, C.A. Gardner 12030 (holo: PERTH 01066285).
254
Nuytsia Vol, 12, No. 2 (1998)
Philotheca pachyphylla (Paul G. Wilson) Paul G. Wilson, comb. nov.
Eriostemon pachyphyllus Paul G. Wilson, Nuytsia I: 27 (1970). Type: 20 miles [32 km] west of
Coolgardie, Western Australia, 17 September 1962, M.E. Phillips (holo: AD 964251).
Philotheca reichcnbachii Sieherex Sprengel, Syst. Veg. 4 pt 2: 253 ( 1 827). Philotheca reichenbachiana
Sieber ex Reichb. nom. illeg., Icongr. Bot. Exot. 200 ( 1 828) based on above. Philotheca australis var.
reichenbachiana Maiden & Betclie, Pruc: Linn. Soc. New South Wales 29: 736 (1905). Type: “Nov.
Hoik”, E. W. Sieber 308 (iso: K, MEL 232756, TCD),
Philotheca longifolia Turez., Pull Soc. Natiiralistes Moscou 22/2: 16(1 849). Type: Nova Hollandia,
W. Stephenson 147 (holo: KW, photo seen).
Nomenclature. Sprengel failed to cite any col lections under P. reichenbachii, and while his description
is too brief to permit precise identification, since he attributed the name to Sieber. it can be assumed
that it was based on a Sieber collection from New South Wales. When H.G.L. Reichcnbach redescribed
and illustrated the species, and al the same time altered the spelling of the epithet to reichenbachiana,
he cited Sieber 308 as his source. Bentham (1863) recognized this species |as Philotheca
Reichenbachiana] and cited only 308 of the Sieber collections. I have therefore assumed this to be
the type since it appears to have been the only collection of this species made by Sieber.
Notes. Although this species was recognized as disti net from P. australis (= P. salsoHfolia) by Bentham
( 1 863) his description failed to include the long hairs on the anthers which is its most distinct! ve feature.
Possibly because of this omission Mueller ( 1 869) and subsequent botanists have considered the two
taxa to be conspecific. Philotheca reichenbachii is only found in the vicinity of Sydney.
Philotheca rhomboidea (Paul G. Wilson) Paul G. Wilson, comb. nov.
Eriostemon rhomhoideus Paul G. Wilson, Nuytsia 1: 34 (1970). Type: 1 km north of Lake King
township, 16 September 1964, Paul G. Wilson 3228 (holo: AD; iso: PERTH 01616005).
Philotheca salsolifolia (Sm.) Druce. Bot. Soc. E.xch. Club Brit. Isles 4: 639 (1917). - Eriostemon
salsolifolius Sm. in Rees, Cyclo. 1 3; n. 3 ( I 809). - Philotheca australis Rudge nom. illeg . , Trans. Linn.
Soc. Botany I 1 : 298 (1816). Type: Port Jackson, New South Wales, 1 795, J. White (syn: LINN, photo
seen).
Note. Two subspecies can be recognized,
a. Philotheca salsolifolia (Sm.) Druce subsp. salsolifolia
Philotheca gaudichaudiiG. Don, Gen. Syst. 1 : 792 ( 1 83 1 ) nomen subnudum. Type: Port Jackson, New
South Wales, T.N. Baudin (iso: K), .see below.
Eriostemon gracile Graham, Edinburgh New Philos. J. 16: 175 (1834) exdescr. Type: “raised from
seed imported by Mr Cunningham, al Comely Bank Nursery, Edinburgh” (n.v.).
Paul G. Wilson, A taxonomic revicwortlic genera t'/vVurc'wwiandP/i/toftff.a
255
Leaves well-spaced to somewhat crowded, seiniterete, thick, blunt, 3-5 inm long, to slender, acute,
to 12 mill long, glabrous or sparsely ciliate. Pedicels turbinate 1-2 mm long. Cocci almost erect.
Typification. A collection of P. salsoUfoUa at herb. K that was received from the Paris Herbarium in
December 1880 is labelled Philotheca Gaudichaudii Don/Cap Baudin/Nouvelle-Hollande/Port
Jackson. I consider it to be a probable isotype of the latter name.
Distrihution. (Jeeurs in near coastal New South Wales from near Taree south to near Bega, and inland
near Coonabarabran and Pilliga.
Habitat. Generally growing in heathland on sandstone.
Notes. A widely distributed and variable subspecies.
b. Philotheca salsolifolia subsp. pedicellata Paul G. Wilson, subsp. nov.
Folia congesta, lineares, acuta, supra applanata, c. 10 mm longa, glabra. Pedicelli tenues, c. 8 mm
longi. Cocci divergentes.
Typus: 1 mile [ 1 .6 km] from the coast and4.5 miles [7.2 km] south of Yamba, New South Wales, 30 June
1966, LP. c& D.J. McGiliivmy 2\A5 (liolo: NSW 93929).
Leaves crowded, Oattened above, linear, acute, c. 1 0 mm long, glabrous. Pedicels slender, c. 8 mm
long. Cocci spreading.
Additional specimens examined. NEW SOUTH WALES: Angourie, 20 Sep. 1970, M.E. Phillips
CBG 035333 (BRI); Angourie Bay, B. Auld 120484 (NSW).
Distrihution. Known only from near Angourie on the north coast of New South Wales.
Habitat. Growing on sand in coastal or near coastal situations.
Etymology. The subspecific epithet refers to the prominent pedicels of the Bowers.
Philotheca sericea (Paul G. Wilson) Paul G. Wilson, comb. nov.
Eriostemon sericeus Paul G. Wilson, Nuyt.sia 1 : 37 (1970). Type: 15 miles [c. 24 km] east of Kalli,
Western Australia, 22 July 1958, N.H. Speck 1041 (holo: CANB; iso: PERTH 01616013).
Philotheca sporadica (M. Bayly ) Paul G. Wilson, comb. nov.
Eriostemon sporadicitsM. Bayly ,Aiislral. Sy.st. Bot.l: 275 ( 1 994). Type: 1 10 km south-west of Kogan,
Queensland, 1 3 September 1 992, M..I. Bayly, M. Duretto & N. Marsh MJB 1 49 {iso: PERTH 04097246).
Philotheca thryptomenoides (S. Moore) Paul G. Wilson, comb. nov.
Eriostemon thryptomenoides S. Moore, J. Linn. Soc. Bot. 45: 166 (1920). Type: Nungarin, Western
Australia, F. Stoward 7M {n.v.) exdescr.
256
Nuytsia Vol. 12, No. 2 (1998)
Philotheca tomentella (Diels) Paul G, Wil.son, comb. nov.
Eriostemon tomentellus Diels, Bui. Jahrb. Syst. 36: 320 tab, 39 G-J (1904), Type: South of Menzies,
Western Australia, F, Diel.s 5]64i\{holo: B n.v. destroyed); 5 km north ofComet Vale, Western Australia,
5 July 1995, R.J. Cranfield 9852 (neo: PERTH 04366921), neotype here chosen,
E. stowardiiS. Moore, J. Linn. Soc. But. 45:166(1 920), Type: Trayning, Western Australia, F. Stoward
291 {syn: MEL 4547); Nungarin, Western Australia, F. Stowardl94 {syn: n.v.).
Philotheca tubiflora A.S. George, Nuytsia 1 : 208 (1971). Type: Near Point Kidman. Western Australia,
29 June 1963, /f.A George 4506 {hoh: PERTH 1070541).
Philotheca wonganensis (Paul G. Wilson) Paul G. Wilson, comb. nov.
Eriostemon wonganensis Paul G. Wilson, Nuytsia 4: 47 (1982). Type: 13.5 km north-east of Wongan
Hillstownship, Western Australia, 1 September 1980, K. A. Kennea//y 7466 (/lo/o.- PERTH 01005391).
Sect. 2. Erionema
Philotheca sect. Erionema (F. Muell.) Paul G. Wilson, comb. nov.
Eriostemon sect. Erionema F. Muell., PI. Victoria 1: 121 (1862). Type: E. myoporoides DC., fide
Paul G. Wilson, Nuytsia 1: 38 (1970).
Eriostemon aect OsmanthosPau]G.W\hon,Nuytsia 1:51 (1970). Type.E. brucei¥.Mue\\. [-P. brucei
(F. Muell.) Paul G, Wilson],
Critical features. Leaves with tracheoids, exstipulate, glabrous or with simple or rarely stellate hairs.
Petals glabrous or with simple hairs, I -nerved. Staminalfdaments nano'wly oblong, abruptly narrowed
in upper third, usually pilose; anther with 2 (rarely more) glands (sometimes obscure) at base of thin
white apiculum. Seed tlattcned-ellipsoid, 3.5-5 mm long; aril a narrow, fleshy cord along adaxial
margin ; outer testa somewhat coriaceous, smooth, glossy; sclerotcsta smooth ; hilum a prominent linear
groove; raphe basal lleshy, prominent, covered by a thin black crustaccous layer; placental endocarp
membranous, deciduous. (Figure 5)
Chromosome number. n=14 in Philotheca buxifolia, P. hispidula, P. myoporoides, P. obovalis and
P. scabra (Smith-White 1954).
Notes. The nine species of this section differ most noticeably from those of sect. Philotheca in having
two (or more) imbedded glands at the base of the anther apiculum, and in having a seed which is laterally
flattened with a linear hilum and coriaceous outer testa. Recent work has shown that the anthers of
P. brucei, the type of sect. Osmanthos, also have a biglandular apiculum and that its seed
(Figure 5D-F) is similar to that of £. myoporoides (Figure 5A-C).
Paul G. Wilson, A taxonomic reviewof the genera Erinstemon and Philotheca
257
Figure 5. A-C. Seed of Philotheca myaporoides (xl2), from J H. Maiden (NSW 68749). A - view of adaxial surface;
B - lateral view; C - longitudinal radial section. D-F. Seed of Philotheca brucei subsp, brucei (xlO), from R.D. Royce
4473 (PKRTH). D - lateral view; F. - view of adaxial surface; F - longitudinal radial section, with magnified section
through testa.
Philotheca brucei (F. Muell.) Paul G. Wilson, comb. nov.
Eriostemon hruceiF. Muell., Fragtn. 7: 38 (1869). Type: Near Lake Barlee, Western Australia, 1869,
J. Forrest (holo: MEL 4533).
a. Philotheca brucei subsp. brevifolia (Paul G. Wilson) Paul G. Wilson, comb. nov.
Eriostemon brucei subsp. brevifolius Paul G. Wilson, Nuytsia 1; 52 (1970). Type: 34 miles [c. 54 km]
east of Mount Magnet, Western Austral la, 27 August 1 957,7. W. Green 1618 {holo: PERTH 0161 5459).
b. Philotheca brucei (F. Muell.) Paul G. Wilson subsp. brucei
258
Nuylsiu Vol, 12, No. 2 (1998)
c. Philotheca brucei subsp. cinerea (Paul G. Wilson) Paul G. Wilson, comb. nov.
Eriostemon brucei subsp. cinereus Paul G. Wilson, Nuytsia 1 : 53 ( 1 970). Type: Ejah, between Mileura
and Nookawarra Stations, Western Australia, 2 June 1961, S.J.J. Davies (holo: PERTH 01615467).
Philotheca huxifolia (Sni.) Paul G. Wilson, comb. nov.
Eriostemon biLxifoliiis Sin. in Rees, Cycl. 1 3: ( 1 809). Type: Port Jackson, New South Wales, J. White
(lecto: LINN, Smith herb, no 755 .3, lel't-hand specimen), see P.G. Wilson, 1 : 45 ( 1 970) and note
below.
Typification. Two ‘varieties’ were described by Smith under £. buxifolius but hegave no names to these.
Wilson ( 1 970) leclolypit'ied the species name on the variety with the leaves “broadly elliptical, heart-
shaped, and embracing the stem at their base generally even and entire at their edges, though
occasionally furnished, in the very same manner, with blunt glandular teeth”. At the time Wilson had
not seen the corresponding specimen in herb. LINN but this omission has since been rectified (see
above).
a. Philotheca huxifolia (Sm.) Paul G. Wilson subsp. huxifolia
Eriostemon buxifolius var. ellipticus G. Don, Gen. Hist. 1 : 792 (1831). Type: based on lectotype of the
species.
h. Philotheca huxifolia subsp. falcata Paul G. Wilson, subsp. nov.
Philothecae biixifoliae subsp. buxifoliae affinis, a qua imprimis differt foliis conduplicatis,
falcatis, ubi applanatis late ellipticis c. 10 mm longis 8 mm latis, acutis basi cuneatis, supra laevibus
infra verrucosis m statu siccatis.
Typus: 4.5 km south-west of Jervis Bay on the Caves Beach Road, Australian Capital Territory,
120ctobcr \91\,R. Cmw/.v 3720 (/m/o.- NSW 298558; Am- PERTH 00934615).
Similar to subsp. biixifoliu but with leaves conduplicate falcate (or if llattcned then broadly
elliptic), c. 10 mm long and 8 mm wide, acute, narrowed at base, smooth above, somewhat verrucose
below when dry.
Selected specimens e.xamined. NEW SOUTH WALES: Point Perpendicular, July 1 965, W. McReadie
(NSW); Beecroft Peninsula, A.M. Lyne 377 (CANB, PERTH).
Distribution. Jervis Bay area of the Australian Capital Territory and New South Wales.
Habitat. Found near the coast growing in sandy soil in dry sclerophyll forest.
Etymology. The Latin epithet /h/fa/a means falcate and refers to the shape of the leaf when folded.
Note. This subspecies appears to grade northward into subsp. huxifolia.
Paul G. Wilson, A taxonomic review ofthc genera Eriostemon and Philotheca
259
c. Philotheca huxifolia subsp. obovata (G. Don) Paul G. Wilson, comb. nov.
Eriostemon huxifolins subsp. ohovatiis {G. Don) Paul G. Wilson, Nuytsia 1 : 45 (1970). —E. buxifolius
var. o/rovAtMi G. Don, Gen. Hist. 1:792(1831). 7v/je.' Port Jackson, New South Wales, 1795,7. White
(holo: LINN Smith herb. n. 755.3, right-hand specimen).
[Eriostemon buxifolius var. Augustin P. de Candolle, Prod. 1 : 720 ( 1 824).]
Notes. No reference was given by G. Don for the use of the varietal epithet ohovatus nor was any
material cited by him. However, the reference “Smith in Rees” was given for the species, and the
description of the variety is a translation of that provided by de Candolle for Eriostemon buxifolius
var. a. De Candolle’s description in its turn was based on the description given by Smith, loc.cit., for
the variety in which “the leaves are obovate, narrow at the base, bluntly crenate and glandular at the
edges”.
Philotheca hispidula (Sprung.) Paul G. Wilson, comb. nov.
Eriostemon hispichilus Sieberex Spreng., Syst. Veg. 4/2: 164 (1827). Type: F.W. Sieber 305 (iso: K,
MEL 4286 & 4534, TCD).
Philotheca obovalis (A. Cunn.) Paul G. Wilson, comb. nov.
Eriostemon obovalis A. Cunn. in Field, Geogr. Mem. New South Wales 331 (1825). Type: Blue
Mountains, New South Wales, October 1822, A. Cunningham A5 (holo: K; iso: BRI 014176, CANB
251249, MEL 4532).
Philotheca scahra (Paxton) Paul G. Wilson, comb. nov.
Eriostemon scaber Paxton, Paxton ’s Mag. Hot. 11: 1 90 ( 1 844). Type: cult. Messrs Henderson; seeds
from gardens ofC.A.A. von Huegcl (n.v.).
E. scaber Gerard nom. illeg., Hortic. Univ.ser. 2,7: 131 (1846), later homonym. Type.' No mention
of origin (n.v.).
E. scaber A.DC. nom. illeg.. Not. PI. Rar. 10: 8 (1848), later homonym. Type: “Cette especeintroduite
dans Ics jardins de Belgique, a etc presentee par M. Muzy dans une exposition de fleurs, le 22 avril 1 846,
a Geneve” (n.v.).
a. Philotheca scahra subsp. latifolia (Paul G. Wilson) Paul G. Wilson, comb. nov.
Eriostemon scaber subsp. lutifolius Paul G. Wilson, Nuytsia I: 44 (1970). Type: Bundanoon, New
South Wales, 27 September 1957, J.C.R. Halford 259 (holo: NSW 68808).
h. Philotheca scahra (Paxton) Paul G. Wilson subsp. scahra
260
Nuytsia Vol. 12, No. 2 (1998)
Philotheca trachyphylla (F. Muell.) Paul G. Wilson, comb. nov.
Erioxtemon trachyphyllus F. Muell., Defin. Austral. PI. 22 (Junc-July 1855); Trans. Philos. Soc.
Victoria 1 : 99 (Scpl. 1 855). Type: Snowy River near the Pinch Range, New South Wales, F. Mueller
(/?o/o.-MEL 4531; Af).' K).
Philotheca verrucosa (A. Rich.) Paul G. Wilson, comb. nov.
Eriostemon verrucosus A. Rich., Voy. Astrolabe Bot. pt. 2. Atlas tab. 26 (1833) with analysis; Sertum
Astrolabianuin 74 ( 1 834). Type: “Crescit in Nova-Hollandia loco dicto bale Morton”, Moreton Bay,
Queensland [actually collected in Tasmania], (n.v.), see note.
? E. dolabratus H.G.L. Reichenbach, Ic. Bot. Exot. Cent. 2: 36 (1828). Type citation: “E Nova
Hollandia”, (n.v.).
E. obcordatus A. Cunn. ex Hook., J. Bot. Hooker 1: 254 (1834). Type: “About Hobart Town —
Mr Cunningham, Mr Lawrence, 1 831 , (n. 153) /?.C. Gunn, (n. 14)” (i’y/i.- K, <4. Cunningham 17).
Notes. Moreton Bay is in Queensland, however, the plant illustrated in the protologue oi Eriostemon
verrucosus must have come from Tasmania. The French explorer. Admiral Dumont D’Urville,
commander of the corvette L’ Astrolabe, visited Hobart in December 1827 when the type could have
been collected.
The application of the name Eriostemon dolabratus is uncertain and therefore it has not been taken
up for this species.
Philotheca virgata (Hook, f.) Paul G. Wilson, comb. nov.
Eriostemon virgatus Hook, f., ./. Bot. Hooker 2: 417 (1840). Type: Rocky Cape, Tasmania, 1837,
R.C. Gunn 485 (lecto: K; ? isolecto: NSW), see Wilson (1970).
Sect. 3. Corynonema
Philotheca sect. Corynonema (Paul G. Wilson) Paul G. Wilson, comb. nov.
Eriostemon sect. Corynonema Paul G. Wilson, Nuytsia 1: 53 (1970). Type: E. pungens Lindl.
[= Philotheca pungens (Lindl.) Paul G. Wilson].
Critical features. Branchlets pilosulose in furrows between leaf-decurrences. Leaves with tracheoids,
exstipulate, linear or terete. Flowers solitary, axillary or terminal. Petals minutely papillose within,
otherwise glabrous. Staminal filaments erect or inBexed, thick, abruptly apiculate at apex, glabrous
or pilose; anthers minutely white-apiculate,eglandular. Seer/somewhatreniform, plump, 2-4 mm long,
with the attached (placental) endocarp sub-coriaceous and persistent; testa black, longitudinally
striate, not easily separable into two layers, .sclerotesta dominant, hilum short, narrowly oblong in
centre of adaxial face; raphe covered with a glossy crustaceous layer. (Figure 6A-F)
A section of three species, two occurring in Western Australia and one in South Australia and
Victoria.
Paul G. Wilson, A laxonomic review oflhc genera Eriosteimm and Philolheca
261
Notes. The seed morphology alone readily distinguishes this section from the others in Philotheca
and suggests that the three species arc more closely related to each other than their floral and vegetative
morphologies would indicate.
Philotheca fitzgeralclii (C.R.P, Andrews) Paul G. Wilson, comb. nov.
Erio.stemanfhzgeraldiiC.R.P. Andrews, J. W. Austral. Nat. Hist. Soc. no. 1:37 (May 1904). 7y/re,-North
of Esperance, Western Australia, October 1903, C.R.P. Andrews (syn: PERTH 016155 13, 01615521 ).
E. apricus Diels & E. Pritzel, Hot. Jahrh. Syst. 35: 32 1 (Oct. 1904); Phebalium apricum (Diels) Ewart
& B. Rees, Proc. Roy. Soc. Victoria ser. 2, 25: 1 I I (1912), Type: Near Gilmores, Western Australia,
L. Diels 5267 (i.w: PERTH 01615548),
E. gibbosus Luehm. ex Ewart, Proc. Roy. Soc. Victoria ser. 2, 20: 79 ( 1 907). Type: Near Norseman,
Western Australia, 1 897, J.D. Batt [holo: MEL 4719).
Philotheca pinoides (Paul G. Wilson) Paul G. Wilson, comb. nov.
Eriostemon pinoides Paul G. Wilson, Nuytsia 1: 54 (1970). Type: Summit of Mt Peron, Western
Australia, 26 August 1949, C.A. Gardner 9408 (holo: PERTH 1137247).
Philotheca pungens (Lindl.) Paul G. Wilson, comb. nov.
Eriostemon pungens Lindl. in Mitchell, Three Exped. E. Australia 2: 156 (1838); Phelalium pungens
(Lindl.) Bcnth., FI. Austral. 1 : 338 ( 1 863). Type: Mt Hope, Victoria, 28 June 1 836, T.L. Mitchell 202
(holo: CGE; iso: MEL 4902).
Sect. 4. Cyanochlamys
Philotheca sect. Cyanochlamys (F. Muell.) Paul G. Wilson, comb. nov.
Eriostemon subgen. Cyanochlamys Bartl. ex F. Muell., PI. Indig. Col. Victoria 1: 119 (1862). —
Eriostemon sect. Cyanochlamys (L. Muell.) F. Muell., Fragm. 9: 110(1 875). Type: E. spicatusA. Rich.
[= Philotheca spicata (A. Rich.) Paul G. Wilson].
Critical features. Branchlets with stellate hairs. Leaves with tracheoids. Inflorescence a terminal
cluster or raceme; pedicel with a pair of basal bracteoles or these gland-like. Petals thin, glabrous.
Staminal filaments free, flattened, pilose; anther white-apiculatc, not glandular. Disc a narrow ring
around base of ovary. Cocci erect, apiculatc or shortly rostrate. Seed sub-reniform, abaxial margin
convex, adaxial margin straight; attached (placental) endocarp thin, caducous; aril slender, linear,
along adaxial face, firmly attached to plaecntal-endocarp and easily separated from seed; outer testa
membranous; selerotesta smooth; hilum superficial, linear; raphe .small, sub-ba.sal, covered by only a
thin integument; chalaza near base of adaxial margin. (Figure 6G, H).
A section of two species, both endemic to Western Australia.
262
Nuytsia Vol. 12, No. 2 (1998)
Figure 6 A-C. Seed of Philolheca fitzuerciUiii (xIO) from C.A. Gardner 2926 (PERTH). A - lateral view; B - view
of adaxial surface; C - longitudinal radial section, with magnified section through testa. D-F. .Seed of Philotheca pinoides
(xlO) from C. Chapman 3 Jan. 1971 (PERTH). D - lateral view; E - view of adaxial surface; F - longitudinal radial
section. G, H. Seed of Philotheca nodijlora subsp. Utsiocalyx (xlO) from A. Strid 20961 (PERTH). G - lateral view
of seed; H - view of adaxial surface.
Paul G. Wilson, A taxonomic review ol'the genera Erio.slemon and Philolheca
263
Philotheca nodiflora (Lindl.) Paul G. Wilson, comb. nov.
Eriostemon nodiflorus Lindl., Sketch Veg. Swan-Riv, Col. 17(1839). Type: Swan River Colony,
Western Australia, 1839,7. Drummond s.n. {holo: CGE).
Distribution. This species is endemic to the south-west of Western Australia.
Note. Four subspecies can be recognized.
1 Flowerheads 2-3 cm diain.; petals elliptic
2 Sepals glabrous (but ciliate) subsp. calycina
2: Sepals pilose
3 Petals pilose outside subsp. latericola
3: Petals glabrous outside subsp. nodiflora
I : Flowerheads 1-1.5 cm diam.; petals obovate subsp. lasiocalyx
a. Philotheca nodiflora subsp. calycina (Turez.) Paul G. Wilson, comb, et stut. nov.
Eriostemon calycinus Tuvci., Bull. Soc. Imp. Naturalistes Moscou 22/2: 14 (1849). Type: Western
Australia, J. Drummond IV coll. n. 93 (holo: KW; iso: TCD).
Distribution. Found near Wooroloo and Wagin in south-western Western Australia
Habitat. 'Phis subspecies grows in gravelly soil.
b. Philotheca nodiflora subsp. lasiocalyx (Domin) Paul G. Wilson, comb. nov.
Eriostemon nodiflorus var. lasiocalyx Domin, Vestn. Krai. Ceske Spolecn. Nauk, Tr. Mat.-Prir. 2: 54
(1923). - E. nodiflorus subsp. lasiocalyx (Domin) Paul G. Wilson, Nuytsia I: 58 (1970). Type:
Cranbrook to Warrungup, sandy plains, Mt Toolbrunup, Western Australia, /4. A. Dorrien-Smith (n.v.).
Distribution. This subspecies occurs in southern Western Australia from Collie eastwards to Duke of
Orleans Bay.
Habitat. Usually found growing in heathland on sandy loam.
c. Philotheca nodiflora subsp. latericola Paul G. Wilson, subsp. nov.
Ex affinite B. nodiflora subsp. nodiflora sed petalis extra longe-pilosis differt.
Typus: Near York, Western Australia, 28 September 1921, P.A. Sargent (holo: PERTH 00895830).
Similar to subsp. nodiflora but with petals that are long-pilose on their abaxial surface.
Selected .specimen examined. WESTERN AUSTRALIA: 13 km S on Watershed Road off Brookton
Highway, R.J. Cranfield 1977 (PERTH).
264
Nuytsia Vol. 12, No. 2 (1998)
Distribution. Occurs in the Darling Range, Western Australia, between York and Bannister.
Habitat. Found growing on lalcrite and ironstone.
Etymology. The epithet refers to the plant’s preferred habitat,
d. Philotheca nodiflora (Lindl.) Paul G. Wilson subsp. nodiflora
Eriosternon nodiflorus var. suhglahriflorus Domin. Vestn. Krai Ceske Spolecn. Nauk, Tr. Mat.-Prir.
2: 54 ( 1 923). Type: no specimens cited (see note below).
Distribution. This subspecies occurs between Chittering and Bindoon in the Darling Range of Western
Australia.
Habitat. Found along creeks or in seasonal swamps.
Notes. Domin derived the Latin descriptions of his two varieties from the English descriptions of the
two ‘forms’ mentioned by Benlhani( 1 863). Bentham did not name these ‘forms’ and he did not indicate
to which of them the collections he cited belonged. Domin cited one collection under var. lasiocalyx
but none under var. siihglabrifJorus.
Philotheca spicata (A. Rich.) Paul G. Wilson, comb. nov.
Eriosternon spicatiis A. Rich., Voy. Astrolabe Bot. part 2, Atlas tab. 27 (1833) (with analysis); Sertum
Astrolabianum 76 ( 1 834). Type: “Nova-Flollandia” {n.v.).
E. racemosusE.nd\. in Endl. et ai, Enum. PI. Fluegel. 15 (1837). Type: Swan-River Colony, Western
Australia,/;'. Huegel (n.v., ex descr.).
E. ebracteatusEndl., loc. cit. Type: King George Sound, Western Australia, K. Huegel (n.v., exdescr.).
E. effusus Turez., Bull. Soc. Imp. Naturalistes Moscou 22/2: 14 (1849). Type: Western Australia,
J. Gilbert 95 (liolo: KW).
Acknowledgements
I am grateful to Paul Forster for providing additional material to illustrate Philotheca acrolopha;
to Jim Armstrong and Michael Bayly for discussions on various aspects of the taxonomy of the
Erio.stemon group; and, most particularly, to Margaret Wilson for preparing Figure 4 and to Annemarie
Wilson for preparing the other illustrations used in this paper.
Paul G. Wilson. A taxonomic review ol the genera £^nVM/67«rM and Philotheca
265
References
Armsirong, J.A. (1991). ‘‘Sludies on pollinalion and systematics in the Australian Rutaceae.” Ph.D. Thesis, University
of New South Wales.
Bayly, M.,1., Brophy, J.L., Forster, P.I., Goldsack, R.J., & Wilson, Paul G. (1998). Reinstatement of Erioslemon banksii
(Rutaceae), with a report on the composition of leaf essential oils in E. banksii and E. australasius s.str. Australian
Systematic Batany 11: 1 3-22.
Bentham. G. (1863). “Flora Australiensis.” Vol. I. (Lovell Reeve: London.)
Farr, E.R., Leussink, J.A. & Stallcu, F A. (eds) (1979). "Index Nominum Genericorum.” Vol. 1. (Bohn, Scheltema &
Holkcma: Utrecht.)
Gaertner, K.F. (1803). “De fructibus et seminibus plantarum." Vol. 3. (Richter: Leipzig.)
Gueira, M. dos S. (1984). New chromosome numbers in Rutaceae. Plant Systematics and Evolution 146: 13-30.
Hartley, T G. (199.3). A new combination in Boronella (Rutaceae) and a view on relationships of the genus. Bulletin
du Museum National d'Histoire Naturelle. Section B, Adansonia ser. 4, 17: 107-111.
Keighery, G..I. (1978), Chromosome numbers in Western Australian Plants, 1, Journal of the Royal Society of
Western Australia 60: 10,3-106.
Mueller, F. (1869). “Fragmenta Phytographiac Australiae.” Vol. 7. (Government Printer: Melbourne.)
Rao, T.A. (1991). “Compendium of foliar sclcreids in angiosperms." (Wiley Eastern Ltd: New Delhi.)
Rao, T.A. & Bhattacharya. .1. ( 1978). Taxonomic significance of foliar sclcreids in Boronia Sm. (Rutaceae), Proceedings,
Indian Academy of Sciences. Section B 87: 197-203.
Rao, T.A. & Bhattacharya, .1, (1981). Comparative morphology of foliar sclcreids in Boronia Sm. (Rutaceae).
Proceedings. Indian Academy of Sciences. Plant Sciences 90: 9-29.
Smith-White, S. (19,34). Chromosome numbers in the Boronieae (Rutaceae) and their bearing on the evolutionary
development of the tribe in the Australian flora. Australian Journal of Botany 2: 287-303.
Wilson, P.G. (1970). A taxonomic revision of the genera Crowea. Eriostemon and Phebalium (Rutaceae). Nuytsia 1:
5-133.
266
Nuytsia Vol. 12, No. 2 (1998)
Nuytsia 1 2(2):267-288( 1 998)
267
New species and nomenclatural changes in Phebalium and
related genera (Rutaceaej
Paul G. Wilson
Western Australian Herbarium, Department of Conservation and Land Management,
Locked Bag 104, Bentley Delivery Centre, Western Australia 6983
Abstract
Wilson, Paul G. New species and nomenclatural changes in Phebalium and related genera
(Rutaceae). Nuytsia 12 (2): 267-288 (1998). Phebalium isconsidered to consist only of those species
previously included in sect. Phebalium. The other three sections of Phebalium are either raised to
generic status or referred to other genera: Phebalium sect. Goniociadosis united with Rhadinothamnus,
Phebalium sect. Eriostemoides is united with Nematolepis, and Phebalium sect. Leionema becomes
the genus Leionema. A key to genera that have been associated with Phebalium is provided.
In Phebalium four new species and one new subspecies are described: P. appressum Paul G. Wilson,
P. elegans, P. festivum, P. glandulosum subsp. nitidum, and P. laevigatum. Also, one new name,
P. brevifolium is published, and two new combinations are made.
In Nematolepis six new species combinations are made. In Rhadinothamnus two species and two
infraspecific combinations arc made. In Leionema one species, L. ellipticum, is described as new and
22 new species combinations and one infraspecific combination are made.
Introduction
For over 100 years, following Bentham (1863), the genus Phebalium (Rutaceae) has been widely
regarded as a discrete taxon, for although Mueller (1875) united it with Eriostemon his classification
has not been accepted.
In 1970 the genus was divided into four sections (Wilson 1970) but it was recognized that the
species in three of the sections were more closely related to one or more species in other genera than
they were to those in other sections of Phebalium. The situation appeared to be as follows:
1. Phebalium sect. Phebalium - closely related to Microcybe species.
2. Phebalium sect. Eriostemoides - closely related to Nematolepis phebalioides.
3. Phebalium sect. Gonioclados - closely related to Rhadinothamnus euphemiae and to Chorilaena
quercifolia.
4. Phebalium sect. Leionema - with no close relatives.
268
Nuytsia Vol. 12, No. 2 (1998)
These suggested relationships, which were largely based on floral characters, are now strongly
supported by seed morphology which is distinct and uniform within each of the above groups.
The traditional classification obviously requires attention. The options that are available in order
to provide a more natural classification are:
1. to unite under Phebaliurn all the closely related genera that are indicated above, or
2. to recognize that Phebaliurn consists of the species in sect. Phebaliurn, with or without the inclusion
of Microcybe, and to transfer those species in sect. Gonioclados to Rhadinothamnus, and those in
sect. Eriostemoides to Nematolepis, while sect. Leionema would be given generic status.
It has been decided to take the second course, in particular because each of the resultant genera is
homogeneous and clearly distinct morphologically. Microcybe, which is closely related to Phebaliurn
but differs in having sessile flowers and 2-carpellary ovaries, is retained as a distinct genus.
This paper is a precursor to an account of the genera that will be published in Volume 26 of the “Flora
of Australia”, therefore descriptions arc only provided for newly recognized or newly circumscribed
taxa.
Hilar strands of the seed
The ovaries and developing carpels in dried herbarium material of a number of genera in the
Rutaceae tribe Boromeae were studied in order to establish the homology of certain characters evident
on the seed.
In some genera of the Boronieae the seed possesses a cream-coloured ligament-like tissue on its
adaxial surface between the micropyle and the chalazal opening. This tissue has the appearance when
dry of a cartilaginous strand; it surrounds the hilum and extends, as a single thread, to the raphe. This
cartilaginous material, which is here called the ‘hilar strand’, is shed on, or shortly after, the dispersal
of the seed.
Hilar strands of identical form and origin are found in seed of the following taxa:
1. Chorilaena (V\guK 1)
2. Phebaliurn sect. Gonioclados
3. Rhadinothamnus euphemiae
4. Asterolasia p.p.
From a study of stages in the development of ovules through to seed in the above taxa, and
comparing these stages with similar stages in seeds of other members of the Boronieae, it became
apparent that the hilar strand arises from the narrow portion of the outer testa (formed from the outer
integument) that surrounds the hilum. In early stages of seed development the future strand is intimately
fused to the rest of the outer testa but when nearly mature it becomes separated and eventually falls
away from the seed.
Paul G. Wilson, Phebalium - new species and noincnclatural changes
269
h'igure I . Choriluena qiwrcifolui seed (x 1 5). A - adaxiai surface with hilar strands attached; B - lateral view with hilar
strands attached; C - adaxiai surface without hilar strands; D - longitudinal radial section; c - chalazal aperture; h - hilum;
hs - hilar strands; m inicropylc; s - sclcrotcsla. Drawn frotn Paul (1, Wilson 3976 (PERTH).
In most genera of the Boroniette a pale line around the hilum can be observed in the developing
ovule. In Crt/Trtrt 111 is area retnai ns pale in the mature seed. In /?ora/i/a sect. Boronia andin Eriostemon
sect. Erionema this area becomes brittle (and usually glossy) and raised around an apparently sunken
hilum. In Flulolheca and in Eriostcnion sect. Nigrostipulae the developing ovule has a brown ring
around the hilum and raphe atid this appears to develop into the hard cover to the raphe.
The hilar strand is therclore apparently homologous with the lips that surround the hilum and raphe
in Boronia sect. Boronia and in Eriostemon sect. Erionema, and is homologous with the hard cover
to the raphe that is found in Dnimninndila, Geleznowia, and Eriostemon sect. Nigrastipulae.
It IS unlikely that llie hilarslrands arose mdependenlly in Chorilaena and in Rhadinorhamnus since
a close relationship hei ween these genera is supported by olhercharacters, e.g. the hemispherical calyx.
270
Nuytsiu Vol. 12, No. 2 (1998)
the valvate petals, and the non-glandular apiculuin to the anthers. A relationship with Asterolasia is
more remote since in that genus the calyx is extremely small, the petals are imbricate, and the anthers
have a glandular apiculuin.
Key to genera of the Phebalium group
1 Anthers basifixed, apex with a prominent spherical gland; bracteoles
basal to pedicel and insignificant
2 Flowers pedicellate; sepals united; carpels 5 Phebalium
2; Flowers sessile; sepals free or united; carpels 2 Microcybe
1 ; Anthers versatile, wilhout an apical gland; bracteoles medial or supra-medial
on pedicel
3 Sepals united; anthers obtusely apiculate
4 Plants lepidote; flowers solitary or cymose Rhadinothamnus
4: Plants with stellate hairs; inflorescence a 6-llowered umbel Chorilaena
3.' Sepals free; anthers refuse at apex
5 Plants lepidote; sepals imbricate; petals imbricate or united Nematolepis
5: Plant glabrous or with simple or stellate hairs; sepals valvate; petals
valvate or united Leionema
Leionema
Leionema (F. Mucll.) Paul G. Wilson, gen. el comb. nov.
Eriostemon BtcX.LeionenuiY'. Mucll., PL Victoria I ; 1 25 ( I Phebaliumsect Leionema (F . Muell.)
Benth., FI. Austral. 1 ; 337 ( 1 863). Type: Leionema bilobum (Lindl.) Paul G. Wilson.
Eriostemon sect. Chorilaenopsis F. Muell., op. cit. 131. Type: Eriostemon phylicoides F. Muell.
[= Leionema diosmeum (A. Juss.) Paul G. Wilson |.
5/tnrf>.y, glabrous or with simple or stellate hairs. Branches smooth. Leaver, alternate, simple, sessile
or shortly petiolate, glandular-punctate, smooth. Flowers terminal or axillary, cymose or solitary,
pentamerous. Pedicels slender, medially bibracteolate. Sepals free. Petals free or united, valvate,
elliptic, usually glabrous; apex in flexed. Stamens 10; filaments terete, glabrous; anthers versatile,
loculi deeply separated at base, apex deeply refuse, terminal gland or apiculum absent. Disc usually
present and forming a short gynophore. Carpels 5. glabrous or stellate-hairy, apex sterile. Ovules 2
per carpel. Style solitary, slender, glabrous, affixed to adaxial medial surface of carpels; stigma
minutely lobed. Seed sub-reniform. c. 3 mm long, adaxial margin ± straight; outer testa thin, smooth;
sclerotesta smooth; hilum linear to narrowly elliptic; raphe fleshy basal or sub-basal with a thin
coriaceous to crustaceous glossy covering; chalazal opening basal or sub-basal, obscured by raphe;
placental endocarp thick, persistent. (Figure 2)
Chromosome number. n=I6 (Smith- White 1954).
A genus of 22 species, 2 1 in the eastern States of Australia and one in New Zealand.
Paul G. Wilson, Phebtiliuin - new species and noinenclatural changes
271
Figure 2. Leionemn luiHpropliyltiiin seed (xlO). A - lateral view; B - adaxial surface; C - longitudinal radial section
with enlarged .section through testa; c - chalazal aperture; h - hilum; tn - micropyle; ot - outer testa; r - raphe;
s - scicrotcsta. Drawn from F. Mueller s.n. (MKL 4318)
Notes. The relationship of this genus to others in the tribe Boronieae is not clear, however, it appears
to show no close alTinity to Phehalium s. str., to Rhadinothamnus , or to Nematolepis.
Leionema elliptica differs from the other members of the genus in leaf form, in having minutely
apiculate anthers, and in having a divided disc. It is probably wrongly placed in this genus, but until
fruit and seed are available its correct classification may not be apparent.
Leionema ambiens (F. Muell.) Paul G. Wilson, comb. nov.
Eriostemon ambiens F. Muell., Fragm. 6: 166 (1868). - Phebalium ambiens (F. Muell.) Maiden &
E.Betche, Census New South Wales PI. 1 16(1916). Type.- near Timbarra, New South Wales, C. Stuart
570 (lecto: MEL 4552)/(c/c Wilson (1970).
Distribution. Occurs in the Guyra district in the extreme north-east New South Wales and near
Wallangarra in south-east Queensland.
Leionema bilobum (Lindl.) Paul G. Wilson, comb. nov.
Phebalium bilobum Lindl. in T. Mitch., Three Exped. Australia 2; 177 (1838). - Eriostemon
hillebrandiiF. Muell. no/n. illeg., Trans. Philos. Soc. Victoria 1 : 10(1 854) including P. bilobum. Type:
Mt William, Victoria, 15 July 1836, T. Mitchell 249 (holo: CGE; iso: K, MEL).
E. hillebrandii var. longifoliusF. Muell., Trans. Philos. Soc. Victoria 1 : 10 (1 854). Type: Mt William,
Victoria, November 1 853. F. Mueller (.syn: MEL 4608, 4616, 4617).
P. truncutum Hook.f., FI. Tasm. 1: 64 t. 9 (1855). Type: Flinders Island, Tasmania, R. Gunn 1947
(syn: H(3).
E. serrulatus F. Muell., Fragm. 1:4 (1 858). Type: Bunip-Bunip Creek, Victoria, F. Mueller (holo:
MEL 4620; Lw: K).
272
Nuytsia Vol. 12, No, 2 (1998)
Distribution. Occurs in Victoria in The Grampians, Central Highlands, and west Gippsland; in
Tasmania on the mainland and on islands in Bass Strait.
Leionema carruthersii (F. Muell.) Paul G. Wilson, comb. nov.
Eriostemon carruthersii F. Muell., Victorian Nat. 7: 46 ( 1 890). - Phebalium carruthersii (F. Muell.)
Maiden & E. Betche, Census New South Wales PI. 1 16 (1916). Type: Moruya, New South Wales,
W. Bauerlen 564 {lecto: MEL 4638; isolecto: MEL 4639)/(Je Wilson (1970).
Distribution. Occurs in the Batemans Bay to Bega district of New South Wales.
Leionema coxii (F. Muell.) Paul G. Wilson, comb. nov.
Eriostemon coxiiF.Muc]\.,Australas. Chem. Druggist!: 64 (Dec. - Phebaliumcoxii(F. MueW.)
Maiden & E. Betche, Census New South Wales PI. 116(1916). Type: Braidwood district. New South
Wales, W. Baeuerlen 199 (holo: MEL 4649; iso: NSW 70184).
Distribution. Occurs chiefly in the Budawang Range in south-eastern New South Wales.
Leionema dentatum (Sm.) Paul G. Wilson, comb. nov.
Phebalium dentatum Sm. in Rees, Cyclop. 27: ( 1 814). Type: “Brought by Gen. Grose from some part
of New Holland, and communicated to us by A.B. Lambert Esq” (holo: LINN).
P. salicifolium A. Juss., Ann. Sci. Nat. (Paris) 4: 472 (1 825). Type: Port Jackson, New South Wales,
anon. [n.v.).
Eriostemon umbellatusTurcz., Bull. Soc. Imp. Naturalistes Moscou 22/2; 15 (1849).-P. umbellatum
(Turcz.) Turcz., op. cit. 25/2: 1 60 ( 1 852). Type: 1 25 miles [c. 200 km] from Sydney, New South Wales,
W. Stephenson (holo: KW photo seen).
Distribution. Occurs in New South Wales chiefly near the coast from Illawarra north to Port Stephens,
and also in the Gibraltar Range.
Leionema diosmeum (A. Juss.) Paul G. Wilson, comb. nov.
Phebalium diosmeum A. Juss., /)/(«. Sci. Nat. (Paris) 4: 472 ( 1 825). - P. phylicoides Sieber ex Spreng.
nom. illeg., Syst. Veg. 4 pt 2; 1 640 ( 1 827), superlluous name based on above.- Eriostemon phylicoides
F. Muell. nom. illeg., Fragm. 1; 107 (1859). Type: Port Jackson, New South Wales, comm. J. Gay
(iso: K).
Chorilaena angustifolia F. Muell., Trans. Philos. Soc. Victoria 1: 10 (1854) [as angustifolio]. Type:
Argyle County [i.e. Goulburn district], New South Wales, anon. 826 (holo: MEL 4680; iso: K,
MEL 4812).
Distribution. Occurs near the south-east coast of New South Wales.
Paul G. Wilson, Phebalium - new species and nomenclatural changes
273
Leionema elatius (F. Muell.) Paul G. Wilson, comb. nov.
Eriostemon elatiorF. Muell., Fragm. 1:181(1 859). - Phebalium elatius (F. Muell.) Benth., FI. Austral.
1 : 340 ( 1 863). Type: Near Tcnterfield, New South Wales, C. Stuart 153 {holo: MEL 4700).
Distribution. Occurs in north-cast New South Wales and extreme south-east Queensland.
Notes. Two subspecies are recognized.
a. Leionema elatius (F. Muell.) Paul G. Wilson subsp. elatius
Distribution. Occurs in ranges in norlh-east New South Wales north of Bulahdelah, and in the extreme
south-east of Queensland.
b. Leionema elatius subsp. bcckleri (F. Muell.) Paul G. Wilson, comb. nov.
Eriostemon beckleriF.Mud\.,Friigm. 9: 109(1875).-P. ijec/:/eri(F. Muell.)Engler mEngler&Prantl,
Nat. Pfianzenfam. Ill 4: 141 (1890); Phebalium elatius subsp. beckleri (F. Muell.) Paul G. Wilson,
Nuytsia 1: 105 (1970). Type: McLcnnan’s Creek, Clarence River, New South Wales, H. Beckler
{holo: MEL 4589; iso: NSW 69929).
Distribution. Known from a small area in the McPherson Range, Queensland and north-eastern New
South Wales.
Notes. A plant from Hungry way Creek, Colo, New South Wales, referred to as 'Phebalium species A’
by Weston & Porteners (1991), may be a hybrid since it has deformed flowers and apparently sterile
anthers. Although it most closely resembles L. elatius the latter species has not been recorded from
the Colo area.
Leionema ellipticum Paul G. Wilson, sp. nov.
Ramuli laeves, nitidi, glabri. Folia glabra, chartacea, elliptica, ad 5 cm longa, 2 cm lata, Integra,
obtusa, in petiolem 5 mm longa ad basim attenuata. Intlorescentia terminalis, cymosa, multiflora,
c. 2 cm longa, sparse puberula pilis simplicibus vel fasciculatis tectis; bracteolae caducae; pedicelli
1-2 mm longi. Flores glabri; sc.pala prope basim breviter connata, carnosa, deltata, c. 0.8 mm longa;
petala valvata, crassa, anguste oblonga, c. 4.5 mm longa, 1.3 mm lata, manifeste carinata, alba, ad
apicem incrassata et leviler inllexa; stamina petala breviter superantia, filamentis gracilibus, teretibus,
antheris cordatis, c. 1 .2 mm longis, obtuso mucronatis; ovarium glabrum; stylus teres petalis leviter
brevior.
Typus: Mountain in north-east Queensland [precise locality withheld], 25 December 1991,
K.R. McDonald {holo: BRI 520388).
Shrub to 2 m high. Branclilets smooth, glossy, glabrous, somewhat angular when dry due to ribs
decurrent from leaf bases. Leaves glabrous; lamina chartaceous, pinnately veined, pellucid-dotted,
elliptic, to 5 cm long, 2 cm wide, entire, obtuse, narrowed at base into a petiole to 5 mm long.
Inflorescence terminal, cymose, multillowered, c. 2 cm long, sparsely puberulous with simple and
274
Nuytsia Vol. 12, No. 2 (1998)
fasciculate lulirs; pedicels 1-2 mm long; bracleoles caducous. F/rnver.s' glabrous. 5e/7«/.v5, very shortly
united at base, tleshy, deltate, c. 0.8 mm long. Petals valvate, thick, firm, narrowly oblong, c. 4.5 mm
long, 1..3 mm wide, strongly keeled, white; apex thickened and slightly inflcxed. Stamens glabrous;
filaments slender, terete, shortly exceeding petals; anthers cordate, c. 1 .2 mm long, bluntly mucronulate.
Gynophore c. 0.5 mm high, deeply 1 0-grooved. Ovary barrel-shaped, c. 1 .3 mm high, glabrous or with
a few minute hairs, terminal 1/3 solid; style fixed to near base of carpels, terete, slightly shorter than
petals. Fruit not seen.
Specimens examined. Known only from the type collection.
Distribution. North-east Queensland.
Habitat. Windswept shrubland on top of mountain.
Etymology. Theepithctisderived from IheLatin e//(/7((CMS- and refers to theelliptical shape of the leaves.
Notes. This species is only known from the type collection. The flowers arc similar to those of other
species of Leionema except for the anthers which are bluntly mucronulate (not retuse) and for the
gynophore which is deeply grooved. These anomalous characters suggest that it is incorrectly placed
in this genus although neither T, Hartley (CANB pers. comm.), nor I can suggest a more appropriate
one. I consider that it would be inadvisable for it to be described as a new monotypic genus while
fruiting material is lacking.
Leionema equestre (D.A. Cooke) Paul G. Wilson, comb. nov.
PhebaliumequestreD.A.CookcJ. Adelaide Hot. Card. 10:241 (1987). Type.- Kangaroo Island, South
Australia, B.M. Overton 435 (iso: PERTH).
Distribution. Endemic to Kangaroo Island, South Australia.
Leionema gracile (C.T. White) Paul G. Wilson, comb. nov.
Phebalium gracile C.T. White, Proc. Ray. Soc. Queensland 50: 69 (1939). Type: Mt Greville,
Queensland, C.T. White 99A1 {halo: BRI 011387).
Distribution. Occurs in extreme south-east Queensland where it is apparently restricted to the summits
of Mt Moon and Mt Greville.
Leionema hillehrandii (J.H. Willis) Paul G. Wilson, comb. nov.
Phebalium liillcbramlii J .H. Willis, Victorian Nat. 73 : 1 95 ( 1 957). - Based on Eriostemon hillebrandii
var. brevifoliits F. Muell. no/// illeg., Trans. Philos. Soc. Victoria 1:10(1 854). Type: Mt Lofty Ranges,
South Australia, F. Mueller (leeto: MEL 4590) fide J.H. Willis loc. cit.
Distribution. Occurs in the Mt Lofty Ranges of South Australia.
Paul G. Wilson, Phebalium - new species and nomenclalural changes
275
Leionema lachnaeoicles (A. Cunn.) Paul G. Wilson, comb. nov.
PhebaUum lachnaeoidea A. Cunn. in Field, Geog. Mem. New South Wales 332 (\825). -Eriostemon
phylicifoliu.s var. lachnaeoides (A. Cunn.J F. Muell. ex C. Moore nom. illeg., Handb. FI. New South
Wales 43 (1893). Type: Blackhcath, Blue Mountains, New South Wales, 1822, A. Cunningham 56
{liolo: K; iso: BRI, MEL).
Distribution. A rare species occurring on rocky outcrops in the Blue Mountains, New South Wales.
Notes. This species is similar to some variants ofL. phylicifolium but it can be distinguished from them
principally by the presence of only one flower in the axillary cymes.
Leionema lainprophyllum (F. Muell.) Paul G. Wilson, comb. nov.
Eriostemon kunprophylliis F. Muell., Quart. J. Pharm. Soc. Victoria 2: 43 (1859). - Phebalium
lamprophyIlum{V. Muell.) Benth., FI. Austral. 1 ; 340(1 863). Type: mountains on the Macalister River,
Victoria, January 1 859, F. Mueller (holo: MEL 4784; iso: AD, K, NSW).
Distribution . Occurs in the Dividing Range of eastern New South Wales, from Rylstonc southwards,
and in eastern Victoria.
Leionema micropliyllum (F. Muell.) Paul G. Wilson, comb. nov.
Eriostemon microphyUusV . Muell., Trans. Philos. Soc. Victoria 1; 99 (1855). Type citation: On the
low coast ranges of Spencer’s and St. Vincent’s Gulf. Type: Encounter Bay, South Australia,
27 September, E. Mueller [lecto: MEL 4628) lectotype here chosen.
Phebalium brachyphyllum Benth., FI. Austral. 1; 341 (1863). - Eriostemon hrachyphyllus (Benth.)
Tate, Handb. FI. Extralr. S. Austral. 24 ( 1890). Type: Encounter Bay and near Coffin Bay, South
Australia, F. Mueller (syn: K, MEL 4628).
Distribution. Occurs in southern Eyre Peninsula, South Australia, east to far western Victoria.
Leionema montanum (Hook.) Paul G. Wilson, comb. nov.
Phebalium montanuin Hook., 7. Hot. ( Hooker) 1 : 255 (1 834). -Eriostemon montanus (liook.)F . Muell.,
PI. Indig. Col. Victoria I: 129 (1862). Type: Western Mountains, Tasmania, R. Gunn 283 &
R. Lawrence 321 (.syn: K).
Distribution. Occurs in the mountains of north-east Tasmania.
Leionema nudum (Hook.) Paul G. Wilson, comb. nov.
Phebalium nudum Hook., Icon. PI. 6: t. 568 ( 1 843). -Eriostemon nudus (Hook.) F. Muell., Fragm. 1:181
( 1 859). Type citation: New Zealand; Owae, on the east coast of the northern Island, A/r. Colenso, 1 838
(n. 56). Hokeanga, Edgerley. Type: Owae, New Zealand, Colenso 56 (svn: K).
276
Nuytsia Vol. 12, No. 2 (1998)
Distribution. North Island, New Zealand.
Note. This is the only member of the genus that is found outside of Australia.
Leionema obtusifoHiini (Paul G. Wilson) Paul G. Wilson, comb. nov.
Phebalium obtusifolium Paul G. Wilson, Nuytsia 1 : 1 07 ( 1 970). Type; Upper reaches of Alice Creek,
about 8 miles [c. 13 km] north of Helidon, Queensland, August 1963, F.D. Hackings {holo: BRI
042851),
Distribution. Occurs in the Helidon and Ravensbourne areas of south-east Queensland.
Leionema oldfieldii (F. Muell.) Paul G. Wilson, comb. nov.
Eriostemon oldfieldii F. Muell., Fragm. 1 : 3 (1858). - Phebalium oldfieldii (F. Muell.) F. Muell. ex
Benth., FI. Austral. 1: 340 (1863). Type: Mount La Perouse, 27 February 1857, T, Oldfield &
C. Stuart 1875 (holo: MEL 4822; iso: K).
DLstrihution. Endemic to mountains near the west coast of Tasmania.
Leionema phylicifoliiiin (F. Muell.) Paul G. Wilson, comb. nov.
Phebalium phylicifolium F. Muell., Trans. & Proc. Victorian Inst. Advancem. Sci. 1; 32 (1855). -
Eriostemon phylicifolius (F. Muell.) F, Muell., Fragm. 1: 105 (1859). Type: Munyang Mountains
[Snowy Mountains], also on the Snowy River, New South Wales, January 1855, F. Mueller (lecto:
MEL 4888; isulecto: K) fide Paul G. Wilson ( 1970).
Distribution. Occurs in the mounlains of eastern Victoria and of the extreme south-east of New South
Wales.
Notes. See notes under L lachnaeoides.
Leionema ralstonii (F. Muell.) Paul G. Wilson, comb. nov.
Eriostemon ralstonii F. Muell., Fragm. 2; 1 0 1 . t. 14(1 860). - Phebalium ralstonii (F. Muell.) Benth.,
FI. Austral. 1: 339 (1863). Type: Twofold Bay, New South Wales, F. Mueller (holo: MEL 4945;
i.so: K, MEL 4946),
DLstrihution. Occurs in the Bega to Eden district of New South Wales.
Leionema rotimdifoliuni (Endl.) Paul G. Wilson, comb. nov.
Eriostemon rotundifolius Endl. in Endl. ef «/., Enum, PI. Huegel 15(1 837). - Phebalium rotundifolium
(Endl.) Benth., FI. Austral. 1;341 (1863). Type.- Mount Dangar, Hunters River, New South Wales,
A. Cunningham 55 (iso: K, MEL 4954).
Paul G. Wilson, Phebaliurn - new species and nomenclatural changes
277
Distribution. Occurs in Ihe Howell and Torrington districts of north-east New South Wales and in the
extreme south-east of Queensland.
Leionema synipetalum (Paul G. Wilson) Paul G. Wilson, comb. nov.
Phebaliurn sympetalumPaul G.'Wihon, Nuytsia 1: 1 16(1970). Ty/re.'NearOlinda, New South Wales,
2 September \ 95\, LA.S. Johnson (holo: AD 96434202; Lw: NSW, PERTH 01617079).
Distribution. Occurs in the ranges near Rylstone, New South Wales.
Leionema viridiflorum (Paul G. Wilson) Paul G. Wilson, comb. nov.
Phebaliurn viridiflorum Paul G. Wilson, Nuytsia 1: 117 (1970). Type: Belougery Mountain,
Warrumbungle Range, New South Wales, 28 May 1948, E.F. Constable {holo: NSW 6277; Lso: MEL
4949).
Distribution. Occurs in Mt Kaputar and Warrumbungle Range National Parks, New South Wales.
Nematolepis
Nematolepis Turez., Bull. Soc. Imp. Naturalistes Moscou 25(2): 158 (1852). Type: N. phebalioides
Turez.
Phebaliurn sect. Eriostenioides Endl., Gen. PI. 1156 (1840). Type: Eriostemon squameus Labill.
[= Nematolepis squamea (Labill.) Paul G. Wilson].
Symphyopetalon J. Drumm. ex Harv., Hooker’s J. Bot. Kew Card. Misc. 1: 54 (1855). Type:
S. corraeoides Harv. [= Nematolepis phebalioides Turez.].
Lepidote shrubs or small trees. Branchlets smooth or verrucose. Leaves alternate, simple, ± flat,
shortly petiolate, glandular-punctate, smooth. Flowers axillary, cymose or solitary, pentamerous.
Bracteoles two, near middle of pedicel or apical and immediately subtending the fleshy floral
receptacle. Sepals free, imbricate. Petals imbricate (united in N. phebalioides), lepidote or glabrous.
Stamens 1 0, free; filaments tlattcned terete, glabrous or basally stellate-hairy; anthers versatile, loculi
deeply separated at base, apex slightly rctuse, not glandular. DHc prominent. Carpels 5, with a short,
sterile apex. Ovules 2 per carpel. Style solitary, terete, affixed to adaxial medial surface of carpels.
Srigma scarcely lobed. Seer/ broadly ellipsoid to sub-reniform, 2-2.5 mrn long, adaxial margin straight;
outer tesla thin, coriaceous, smooth, satin-like; sclerotesta smooth; hilum superficial, narrowly elliptic;
raphe small, somewhat cartilaginous, situated between base of hilum and chalazal aperture, covered
by thin coriaceous layer that is continuous with outer testa; chalazal aperture on lower adaxial face;
aril linear; placental endocarp membranous, deciduous. (Figure 3)
Chromosome number. n=16 (Smith-White 1954, Stace & Armstrong 1992).
A genus of seven species endemic to Australia.
278
Nuytsia Vol. 12, No. 2 (1998)
Figure 3. Neimitolepis sqiuunea seed (x25). A - lateral view; B - adaxial surface; C - transverse section with enlarged
section through testa; c - chalazal aperture; h - hiluiii; ni - uiicropyle; ot - outer testa; r - raphe; s - sclcrotesta. Drawn
from F.A. Rodway 1179 (NSW).
Nematolepis elliptica (Paul G. Wilson) Paul G. Wilson, comb. nov.
Phebalium ellipticum Paul G. Wilson, Nuytsia 1 : 34 1 (1 974). Type: Big Badja Mountain, New South
Wales, J.P. Baker901 (halo: NSW; iso: CANB, K, MEL, PERTH 01616587).
Distribution. Occurs in the ranges east ol'Cooiua, New South Wales.
Nematolepis frondosa (N.G. Walsh & Alb.) Paul G. Wilson, comb. nov.
Phebalium frondo.sum N.G. Walsh & Alb., Miielleria 6; 405 (1988). Type: Eastern Victoria [precise
locality withheld], D.E. Albrecht 2875 Uiolo: MEL).
Distribution. Known only from the upper slopes of a mountain in eastern Victoria.
Nematolepis ovatifolia (F. Muell.) Paul G. Wilson, comb. nov.
Phebalium ovatifolium F. Muell, Trans. Philos. Soc. Victoria 1 : 99 ( 1 855). - Eriostemon ovatifolius
(F. Muell.) F. Muell. Fragm. 1 : 1 03 ( 1 859). Type: In the alpine parts of the Munyang Mountains, New
South Wales, F. Mueller (lecto: MEL 4828) fide Wilson (1970).
Distribution. Occurs in the Snowy Mountains of New South Wales.
Nematolepis phebalioidesTurc/,., Bull. Soc. Imp. Naturalistes Moscou25{2): 158 ( 1 852). Type: Swan
River Colony, Western Australia, J. Drummond 5lh coll. n. 194 (holo: KW, photo seen; iso: K, TCD).
Symphynpetalon corraeoides J. Drumm. ex Harv., Hooker’s J. Bot. Kew Card. Misc. 7; 54 (1855).
Type: Near Middle Mt Barren, J. Drummond 194 {holo: TCD; iso: K).
Paul G. Wilson, Pliehalium - new species and noincnclatural changes
279
Distribution. Occurs towards the south coast ol Western Australia from Dumbleyung east to Israelite
Bay.
Nematolepis rhytidophylla (Alb. & N.G. Walsh) Paul G. Wilson, comb. nov.
Phebaliiun liiyticlopliylliiinAWs. & N.G. Walsh. Afue’/ZeWa 6: 402 { 1 988). Type: Wog Wog Mount, New
South Wales, D.E. Albrecht 2333 (halo: MEL 1553279; iso: PERTH 1617044).
Distribution. Occurs on tlic plateau between Wog Wog and White Rock Mountains in far south-east
New South Wales.
Nematolepis scpiamea (Labill.) Paul G. Wilson, comb. nov.
Eriostemon squameus Labill., Nov. Holl. PI. Sp. 1: 111, t.l41 (1806). - Phebalium argenteum
Smith nom. illeg., in Rees, Cyclop. 27: n.3 ( 1 8 14) as to name only. - Phebalium billardieri A. Juss.
noni. illeg., Mem. Soc. Hist. Nat. Paris 2: 134 ( 1825). - Phebalium squameum (Labill.) Engl., Nat.
Pllanzenfam. Ill 4: 141 (1896). Ty/pe.' “Habitat in capite Van-Diemen”, Tasmania (?«o.' MEL 5025,
5026).
Distribution. Widespread in eastern Australia.
Notes. Three subspecies arc recognized.
a. Nematolepis squamea (Labill.) Paul G. Wilson subsp. squamea
Phebalium elatum Cunn. in B. Field, Geog. Mem. New South Wales 33 1 ( 1 825). Type: in the vicinity
of Spring Wood, New South Wales, A. Cunningham {holo: K).
Distribution. Occurs in south-eastern Queensland, coastal New South Wales, Victoria, and Tasmania.
b. Nematolepis squamea subsp. coriacea (Paul G. Wilson) Paul G. Wilson, comb. nov.
Phebalium squameum subsp. coriaceum Paul G. Wilson, Nuytsia 1; 94 (1970).
Type: Between Haidinger Range and Mt Wellington, Victoria, March 1861, F. Mueller (holo: MEL
4833; iso: K).
Distribution. Only known from eastern Victoria in the mountains near the head of the Macallister River
and from near Wulgulinerang.
c. Nematolepis squamea subsp. retusa (Hook.) Paul G. Wilson, comb. nov.
Phebalium retusum Hook.,./. Hot. ( Hooker) I ; 254 ( 1 834). -/2 billardierivM. rctiwu/n (Hook.) Hook. f.,
FI. Tasm. I .• 63 ( 1 855). ~ Phebalium squameum subsp. retusum (Hook.) Paul G. Wilson, Nuytsia 1 ; 94
( 1 970). Type: Tasmania, 1831, /’. Scott & R. W. Lawrence (syn: K photo seen).
Distribution. Occurs in north-eastern fasmama.
280
Nuytsia Vol. 12. No. 2 (1998)
Notes. This subspecies grades into the variant of the typical subspecies that is found in north-east
Tasmania. It is evidently closely related to the subsp. coriacea from Victoria. Superficially it is similar
to N. ovatifolia but it differs in having a glabrous (not lepidote) ovary and in not having sub-floral
bracteoles.
Nematolepis wilsonii (N.G. Walsh & Alb.) Paul G, Wilson, comb. nov.
Phebalium wilsonii N.G. Walsh & Alb., Muelleria 6: 399 (1988). Type: Near Mt Grant, Victoria,
N.G. Walsh 1494 (bolo: MEL 1540265; iso: PERTH 009055069).
Distribution. Known only from the type locality in the Central Highlands of Victoria.
Phebalium
Phebaliumy cat, iaxd. Malm. 2: 102( 1 %Q5).-Eriostemon sect Phebalium (Ysnt.)F. Muell., PI. Victoria
1 : \ 29 (1^62).- Phebalium sect. Euphebaliurn Benth. nom. inval.,¥\. Austral. 1 : 337 (1 863). -Crowa
sect. Phebalium (Vent.) Baillon, Diet. Bot. 1 1 : 277 (1886). Type: P. squamulosum Vent.
Shrubs ± covered when young with a lepidote indumentum. Branches often glandular verrucose.
Leaves alternate, simple, sessile or shortly petiolate, glandular-punctate, often glandular-verrucose.
Flowers terminal to branches, solitary or umbellate, pentamerous. Bracteoles basal to pedicels and
insignificant. Calyx 5-lobed, lepidote outside. Petals free, imbricate, elliptic, white, yellow, or pink,
lepidote outside, apex not inllexed. Stamens 10; filaments slender-terete; anthers basifixed, loculi
totally united, apex rounded with a spherical terminal gland. Disc not apparent. Carpels 5, lepidote,
apical portions solid. Ovules 2 per carpel. Style terete, affixed to adaxial medial surface of carpels;
stigma small with shortly spreading lobes. Seed oblong-reniform; surface longitudinally striate or
corrugate due to the fine corrugations of the sclerotesla; outer testa membranous, black; hilum linear;
raphe small, ileshy and .shrivelled, situated in lower half of adaxial face, covered by membranous layer
that is continous with outer testa; chalazal aperture on lower adaxial face; aril linear; placental endocarp
thin, caducous. (Figure 4)
Chromosome number. n=16, 32 (Smith-White 1954).
A genus of 25 species endemic to Australia.
Notes. This genus, as circumscribed in this paper, is closely related to Microcybe Turez. which is
distinguished by its sessile flowers, small free or united sepals, and bicarpellary ovary. The seeds of
the two genera are similar.
Phebalium appressum Paul G. Wilson, sp. nov.
Ramuli sparse glanduloso tuberculati. Folia densa, sessiles, erecta, ad ramulum adpressa, cordato
ovata, c. 2 mm longa, 1 .5 mm lata, crassa, arete revoluta, supra aliquantum applanata, infra rotundata,
laeves, virides, glabra vel sparse argenteo lepidota. Flores terminales, solitarii vel binati; pedicellus
brevis, crassus, c. 1 mm longus. Calyx c. 1 .5 mm altus, profunde dcltato lobatus, extra ferrugineo
lepidotus.
Paul G. Wilson, Phebaliuin - new species and nomenclatural changes
281
Figure 4, Phebaliuin nottii seed (xI5). A - lateral view; B - view of adaxial surface; C - longitudinal radial
section; c - chalazal aperture; h - hiluni; in ~ niicropyle; r - raphe; s - sclerotesta. Drawn from Lazarides &
Story 113 (CANB),
Typus: North of Coolgardie [precise locality withheld], Western Australia, 16 July 1991, Shreeve &
Spencer s.n. (/to/o; PERTH 4150120).
Rounded to I m high. Rra/ic/t/erj silvery-lepidote, sparsely glandular-tuberculate. Leaves
sessile, dense, erect and appressed to branch, cordate-ovate, c. 2 mm long, 1.5 mm wide, thick, closely
revolute, somewhat flat above, rounded below, smooth, green, glabrous or sparsely silvery-lepidote.
Flowers terminal, solitary or paired; pedicel short and thick, c. 1 mm long, densely ferruginous-
lepidotc, subtended by several narrowly cuneate bracteoles c. 0.5 mm long. Calyx c. 1 .5 mm long,
deeply deltate-lobed, ferruginous-lepidotc outside. Fruit not seen.
Distribution. Known only from the type locality which is in the Coolgardie Botanical District (Beard
1980).
Habitat. Yellow sand plain. Growing in an area that had been refilled with local soil after mining.
Conservation status. The solitary collection is from an area subject to a mining lease which suggests
that the species may be in need of protection. CALM Conservation Code for Western Australian Flora:
Priority One.
Etymology. The specific epithet refers to the leaf position.
Notes. This species differs from the other eleven members of the Phebalium microphyllum complex
in leaf shape and in the usually solitary flowers which have very short and thick pedicels.
Phebalium brevifolium Paul G. Wilson, nom. et stat. nov.
Phebalium tuberculosum subsp. brachyphyllum Paul G. Wilson, Nuytsia 1: 72 (1970). Type: Great
Victoria Desert, camp 59, near Queen Victoria Spring, Western Australia, 22 September 1891,/?. Helms
(holo: AD 96350150; HO.- MEL 481 1, NSW 69582).
282
Nuytsiu Vol. 12, No. 2 (1998)
Notes. This species is only found in an area around Queen Victoria Spring in the Great Victoria Desert
of Western Australia. It is here isolated from other species of Pliebalium and shows no evidence of
intergradation.
Phebaliuni elegaiis Paul G. Wilson, sp. nov.
Ramuli Icpidoti, glanduloso tuberciilati. Folia divaricata. atro-viridia, cuneata, retusa, crassa,
c. 5mm longa, 2-3 mm lata, glanduloso tuberculata, marginis recurva, glanduloso undulata, supra
glabra, infra argenteo- vel ferrugineo-iepidota. Inflorescentia 2-5-noris; pedicelli graciles, 5-10 mm
longi. Calyx c. 1.5 mm altus. Pelala lale elliptica, 4-5 mm longa, alba.
Typus: 9 km WSW of Point Pleasant, Fraser Range, Western Australia, 20 September 1 980, K. Newbey
7536 {holo: PERTH 00909726),
Spreading shrub to 90 cm high. Branchlets spreading, lepidote, glandular-tuberculate. Leaves
spreading, shortly petiolate, dark green; lamina cuneate, retuse, thick, c. 5 mm long, 2-3 inni wide,
glandular-luberculalc (at least when dry), margins recurved and glandular-undulate, upper surface
glabrous, lower surface si 1 very- or ferruginous-lepidote. Inflorescence a terminal umbel of 2-5 flowers;
pedicels .slender, 5-10 mm long, lepidote. Calyx c. 1.5 mm high, silvery- to ferruginous-lepidote
outside, divided two-thirds into debate lobes. Petals broadly elliptic, 4-5 mm long, white, silvery-
to ferruginous-lepidote outside. Fruiting cocci broadly oblong, c. 3 mm high, rounded at apex with
a small spreading apiculum on outer angle.
Distribution. Southern Western Australia from Mt Day (120 km west of Norseman) east to the Fraser
Range, Coolgardie Botanical District (Beard 1980).
Selected specimens examined. WESTERN AUSTRALIA: 96 km E of Norseman, D.E. Albrecht 4032
(PERTH); 98 km E of Norseman, R.J. Cranfleld 10065 (PERTH); 9 km E of Norseman, C.A. Gardner
14222 (PERTH); Ml Day, K.R. Newbey 5273 (PERTH).
Habitat. In well-drained sandy or granitic loam on rocky slopes.
Flowering period. July to September.
Conservation .status. This species is not recorded from a reserve, however, it is found over a wide area
of pastural land and vacant crown land and is not in need of protection.
Etymology. The specific epithet refers to the elegant appearance of the shrub as has been noted by
collectors.
Affinities. This species corresponds most closely to the polymorphic Phebaliurn tuberculosum but it
differs in having long slender pedicels, a cuneate leal (not linear-terete), and a small calyx.
Notes. None of the eleven species in what may be considered the Phebaliurn microphyllum -
P. tuherculosuni group can be satislactorily discriminated since each exhibits a dillerent variant aleach
different locality and each appears to hybruli/.e with those of the group it comes into contact. A similar
situation occurs in /*. elcgans which at its eastern extreme is silvery lepidote and at its western extreme
lerrugmous Icpidiile. The western variant may grade to the south and east into P. obovatuni.
Paul G. Wilson, Phebaliuin - new species and nomcnclatural changes
283
Phebalium festiviim Paul G. Wilson, sp. nov.
Folia coriacea, oblonga vel late ciliptica, 2-3 mm longa, 1-1.5 mm lata, ad apicem rotundata, supra
convexa fere laevia, ad margines recurva ct leviler crcnulata, infra argenteo lepidota. Umbellae parvac,
sessilcs; pcdicelli c. 1 ,5 mm longi. Calyx breviler hemisphericus, 1-1.5 mm altus, laevis, argenteo vel
ferruginco Icpidotus, ad marginem undulatus vel truncatus. Pctala alba, extra ferrugineo lepidota.
Typus: Flagstaff Hi II, 5.5 milesfc. 8.8 km)northofEaglehawk, Victoria, 30 September 1952,/?. Me/v;Y/e
1254 (halo: MEL 520053; Lw: K, n.v.).
Shrub c. 0.6 m high. Branchlets s\cndcr, smooth. Lea vca’ coriaceous, oblong to broadly elliptic,
2-3 mm long. 1-1.5 mm wide; apex rounded; upper surface convex and almost smooth; margins
recurved and slightly crenulate; lower surface silvery-lepidote. Flowers m small sessile umbels
terminal to branchlets; pedicels r. 1.5 mm long. Ca/yx shortly hemispherical, 1-1 .5 mm high, smooth,
silvery- to ferruginous-lepidote, margin undulate to truncate. Petals elliptic, 2.5 x 1.5 mm, white,
ferruginous-lepidote outside.
Selected specimens examined. VICTORIA: Gobarup Flora Reserve, A. C. Beauglehole 6S93\ (MEL);
Painswick, near Dunolly, M.E. Phillips, 1 8 Mar. 1961 (AD); Tarnagulla State Forest, 28 Aug. 1979,
P.G. Smith (MEL).
Distribution. Found near Bendigo in western Victoria.
Habitat. Usually found growing in open eucalypt forest.
Etymology. The epithet /evr/v/au, refers to the pleasant aspect of the plant when in flower.
Notes. Phebalium fe.stivum differs from P. obcordatum Benth., to which species the collections had
previously been referred, principally in the shape of the leaves and in their smooth slightly convex
upper surface which lacks a medial groove, while in addition, the petals of P.festivum are white within,
whereas in P. obcordatum they arc yellow.
Phebaliumglandulo.siiniHook.aiT. Mitch., J.Exped.Trop. Australia 199(1848). Typetc. II miles
[17 km] south of Mt Owen near head of Maranoa River, Queensland, 16 June 1846, T.L. Mitchell 331
(holo: K; iso: MEL 475 1 ).
Notes. This is a widespread and variable species. Three subspecies were recognized by Wilson ( 1 970)
who noted that large-leaved variants ofsubsp. glandulosum occurred in the Warrumbungle Range and
at Mulgowcn vStation south of Bourke. Both of these variants probably warrant recognition, however,
recent collections show that the plants from the Mulgowen locality arc morphologically similar to a
variant ofsubsp. glandulosum found in central and northern Queensland which approaches the type
in leaf-size. On the other hand the variant found in the Warrumbungle Range is geographically and
morphologically di.sjunct from other populations of the species and can be readily circumscribed, it
is described below as subsp. nitidum.
284
Nuytsia Vol. 12, No. 2 (1998)
a. Phebaliuni glandulosum subsp. nitidum Paul G, Wilson, subsp. nov.
Phehalio glanduloso subsp. glanduloso similis sed foliis grandioribus plerumque 2-3 cm longis,
3-5 mm latis, apicc truncatis parum retusis, supra convexis secus costam leviter dcpressis nec
canaliculatis differt.
Typus: Warrumbungle Mountains, New South Wales, 25 May 1 948,£’.F. Constable {holo:'HS'H 6462).
Branchlets sparsely glandular-verrucose. Leaves shortly (2-3 mm) petiolate; lamina narrowly
oblong or narrowly oblong-elliptic, mostly 2-3 cm long, 3-5 mm wide; margin crenate and glandular-
verrucose; base cuneate; apex truncate and slightly retuse; upper surface convex with shallow
depression over midrib, glabrous, glossy, smooth or sparsely glandular-verrucose; lower surface
smooth apart from the sparsely verrucose prominent midrib, fawn lepidote. Pedicels slender, 5-7 mm
long. Calyx hemispherical, glandular-verrucose, c. 2 mm high including the broadly triangular lobes
c. 0.7 mm long.
Specimens examined. NEW SOUTH WALES: Head of Tooraweenah Creek, Warrumbungle Mountains,
L.A.S. Johnson & E.F. Constable (NSW 20490); Mt Naman, 34 km SW of Coonabarabran,
H. Streimann76 \ (PERTH).
Distribution. Endemic to the Warrumbungle Range in north-eastern New South Wales.
Habitat. Evidently confined to rocky basalt slopes.
Etymology. The epithet is derived from the Latin word nitidus which means shining and refers to the
upper surface of the leaves.
Notes. This subspecies has much larger leaves than typical subsp. glandulosum but it is similar to the
large-leaved variant of that subspecies which grows in the Gunderbooka Range south of Bourke in
central New South Wales. The two subspecies may be readily distinguished by the appearance of the
upper surface of the leaves; in subsp. glandulosum there is a sharp depressed line over the midrib
whereas in subsp. nitidum there is a gentle depression. In addition, the leaves of subsp. nitidum are
glossy above when mature whereas in the Gunderbooka Range variant the mature leaves are dull and
often retain a sparse lepidote cover.
Phebalium laevigatum Paul G. Wilson, sp. nov.
Lamina folio anguste oblonga, 12-15 mm longa, 1.5-2. 0 mm lata, obtusa, Integra, supra convexa,
glabrescens, nitida, laevis vel leviter canaliculata, infra lepidota et manifeste costata. Inflorescentia
c. 7-nora; pedicelli gracilcs, c. 4 mm longi. Calyx c. 1 .5 mm altus, ad dimidium in lobis deltatis divisus.
Petala late elliptica, 4-5 mm longa, tlava vel alba, extra ferrugineo-lepidota.
Typus: 48 km ESE of Merredin, Western Australia, N.N. Donner A6QQ (holo: PERTH 896632).
Erect slender shrub to I m high. Branchlets glandular-tubcrculate. Leaves ascending; petiole 2
mm long; lamina narrowly oblong, 12-15 mm long, 1.5-2 mm wide, obtuse, margin entire; upper
Paul G. Wilson, FhehciUiiin - new species and nonienclatural changes
285
surface convex, glabrescent, sparsely silvcry-lepidote, glossy when mature, glandular-punctate,
smooth or faintly channelled; lower surface silvery-lepidote with prominent midnerve. Umbels of
c. 1 flowers; pedicels slender, c. 4 mm long. Calyx c. 1 .5 mm long, ferruginous-lepidote, divided half
way into deltate lobes. Petals broadly elliptic, 4-5 mm long, yellow to white, ferruginous-lepidote
outside.
Selected specimens examined. WESTERN AUSTRALIA: 30 miles [48 km] E of Merredin, P.R. Jefferies
631004 (PERTH); 8.5 km NW ol Wialki, F. M. Mollemans ?>369 (PERTH); Chandler near Campion,
R.D. Royce 2060 (PERTH).
Distribution. Occurs in the Mcrrcdin-Bullfinch area of southern Western Australia.
Habitat. Grows principally in sand heath with Acacia.
Conservation status. This species is widespread, and evidently not under threat.
Etymology. The epithet is from the Latin word laevigatas, which means smooth and polished, and here
refers to the appearance of the leaves.
Notes. This species had been assumed (Wilson 1 970) to represent a stage in the introgression between
P. microphyllum and P. tubercidosum, but it is now evident that it is a distinct taxon which is found
in areas where neither of the other two species occurs.
Phebalium megaphyllum (Ewart) Paul G. Wilson, stat. etcomb. nov.
Eriostemon tuberculosus var. megaphyllus Ewart, Proc. Roy. Soc. Victoria ser. 2, 19: 39 (1907). -
Phebalium tubercidosum subsp. megaphyllmn (Ewart) Paul G. Wilson, Nuytsia 1: 72 (1970).
Type: Cowcowing, Western Australia, September 1904, M. Koch 1330 {holo: MEL 4545).
Notes. This taxon is found in the Wubin to Southern Cross area of Western Australia; it was earlier
(Wilson 1970) considered to be sufficiently similar to the Icctotype of Pebalium tiiberculosum as to
warrant only infraspecific status. However, further study has shown that the two are consistently
different in leaf and Rower characters; I’urthermore, the areas of distribution ofP. tiiberculosum and
P. megaphyllum do not overlap and therefore they do not hybridize in nature with each other, although
each hybridizes with some other species of Phebalium.
Phebalium obovatuni (Paul G. Wilson) Paul G. Wilson, stat. nov.
Phebalium lepidotiim var. obovutum Paul G. Wilson, Nuytsia 1: 74 (1970). Type; Between Israelite
Bay and Point Culver, Western Ausiralia, C. Maxwell (holo: MEL 4801 ).
Notes. This taxon is found in the far south-east corner of Western Australia. When first described the
few collections seen were insulTicient to clearly establish its status. Field studies over the past thirty
years suggest that it warrants recognition as a distinct species.
286
Nuytsia Vol. 12, No. 2 (1998)
Rliadinothamnus
RhadinothamniLsPau\G.\W'\hon.Nuytsia 1 ; 1 97 ( 197 1 ). Type: R. euphemiae (P . Muell.) Paul G. Wilson.
Phebalium seel. Gonioclados Paul G. Wilson, Nuytsia 1 : 96 ( 1 970). Type: Rliadinothamnus anceps
(DC.) Paul G. Wilson.
Silvery-lepidotc shrubs. Branches smooth. Leaves alternate, simple, shortly petiolate. Flowers
cymose or solitary and axillary. Pedicel medially bibracteolate. Calyx patclliform or hemispherical,
undulately lobed. Petals free, elliptic, valvate, slightly intlexed at tip, lepidote outside, white.
Staminal filaments llatiened in lower part, terete above, glabrous; anthers versatile, base cordate, apex
obtuse, with a non-glandular apiculum, white. Disc short. Carpels 5, glabrous or lepidote, with or
without a short sterile apex. Ovules 2 per carpel. Style solitary, terete, attached to adaxial medial
surfaces of carpels; stigma not or scarcely lobed. Seed narrowly reniform or bluntly ellipsoid; outer
testa membranous, dark brown, smooth; sclerolesta smooth; hilum superficial, narrowly elliptic,
bordered by cartilaginous strands (hilar strands); raphe similar to hilar strands in texture, sub-basal,
covered by membranous layer that is continuous with outer testa; aril linear, fleshy, situated between
hilar strands, readily detached.
A genus of three species endemic to Western Australia.
Notes. The genus Rliadinothamnus was established to accommodate the species Nematolepis
euphemiae (sy n. Phebalium euphemiae) that appeared to be anomalous in both of the genera into which
it had been placed. When the genus was first described, comment was made on its close relationship
to the species in Phebalium sect. Gonioclados. but the species in this .section were not concurrently
transferred to the new genus. This action is now taken.
Someofthccharactersthatservetodiscriminate W;ad/«ot/iamn(Marcfoundinthe.seed, inparticular
the manner in which cartilaginoid strands surround the hilum. These characters are described and
discussed above. RefertoFigure \ .ihcsccdoi'Chorilaena, which is the same as that for R/iac/mor/iamnM^.
Rliadinothamnus anceps (DC.) Paul G. Wilson, comb. nov.
Phebalium anceps DC., Prodr. 1:719 (1 824). - Eriostemon anceps (DC.) Sprung., Syst. Veg. 2: 322
(1825). Type.- “NouvelleHollande, cote orientale (Port duRoi Georges)” [King George Sound, Western
Australia], /iV/c Jussieu. Mem. Soc. Hist. Nat. Paris 2: 1 34 ( 1 825) (holo: G-DC).
Distribution. Occurs in the south-west ol Western Australia.
Rhadinothainnus euphemiae (F. Muell.) Paul G. Wilson. Nuytsia I: 198 (1971). — Nematolepis
euphemiaeF. Mud\.,Frdgm. 3: 149 t. 25 (Apr. liiCS).- Phebalium euphemiae (F.Muq\\.)C. A. Gardner,
Enum. PI. Austral. Occ. 70 ( 1 93 I ). Type: Near Cape Arid, Western Australia, G. Maxwell {iso: K).
Phebalium ba.xteri Benlh., FI. Austral. 1 ; 345 (30 May 1863). - Nematolepis baxteri (Benth.) Engler
wEngler&Pranll, Nat. PlJanzenfam. Ill 4: 145(1896). Ty/^e.- South coast, Western Australia, W. Baxter
{holo: K).
Distribution. Occurs near the south coast of Western Australia from the Eyre Range east to Mt Ragged.
Paul G. Wilson, I’hehaliuin - new species and noinenclaUiral changes
287
Rhadinothammis riidis (Barll.) Paul G. Wilson, comb. nov.
Phehalium rude Bartl. in Lchm., PI. Preiss. 1 : 172(1 845). Type: Baldhead, Western Australia, L. Prei.ss
2038 (iso: MEL 4981,4960).
Distribution. Occurs near ihe south coast of Western Australia from Albany east to near Esperance.
Notes. 'I’liree subspecies are recognized,
a. Rhadinothammis riidis (Barll.) Paul G. Wilson subsp. rudis
P. hilohum Barll. noin. illet^., loc: cit., non Lindl. ( 1 838). - Eriosleinon hiloltum F. Muell., Fragm. 1 :
102(1859). Type: Konkoberuphills|MlMelville|.Weslern Australia, L PreDs 2().Pd (i.w: MELA919).
Distribution. Occurs near the south coast of Western Australia between Point Irwin and Cape Arid, but
also recorded m 1898 from Mount Barker.
h. Rhadinothamims rudis subsp. amblycarpus (F. Muell.) Paul G. Wilson, comb. nov.
Eriostemon amblycarpus F. Muell., Fragm. I: 102 (1859). - PhebuUum amblycarpum (F. Muell.)
Benth., FI. Austral. 1 : 345 ( 1 863). - Phehaliuin rude subsp. amblycarpum (F. Muell.) Paul G. Wilson,
Nuyisia 1 : 98 (1970). Tyjte: Fitzgerald River, Western Australia, G. Ma.ywell 935 (liolo: MEL 4556).
Di.s'tribution. Occurs near the south coast of Western Australia, and somewhat inland, frtitn Nyabing
east to near Esperance.
Notes. The subspecies rudis and amblycarpus are distinguished by their leal shape and ovary type
(lepidotc in subsp. rudis and glabrous in subsp. amblycarpus). They usually have separate though at
times adjacent areas of distribution, however, in the Fitzgerald River area are found plants with the
foliage of subsp. amblycarpus but with a lepidote ovary; these plants may represent an intergrade
between the two subspecies.
c. Rhadinothammis rudis subsp. linearis (C.A. Gardner) Paul G. Wilson, comb. nov.
Phehaliuin lineare C.A. Gardner, 7. Roy. Soc. Western Aii.stralia 27 : 1 80 ( 1 942). - P. rude subsp. lineare
(C.A. Gardner) Paul G. Wilson, Nuyt.sia 1 : 98 ( 1 970). Type: Ml Ragged, Western Australia, C.A. Gardner
2864 (iiolo: PERTH 01617052).
Distribution. Known from the Russell Range of south-eastern Western Australia.
Conservation status, 'fliis subspecies is evidently local in its distribution which is, however, totally
within a National Park. CALM Conscrvtition Cotie for Western Australian Flora: Priority Four.
Acknowledgement
The illuslrtUions were picpared by Annemaric Wilson.
288
Nuytsia Vol. 12, No. 2 (1998)
References
Beard, J.S. (1980). A new phytogeographic map of Western Australia. Western Australian Herbarium Research Notes
3: 37-58.
Bentham, G. (1863). Rutaceae. “Flora Australiensis." Vol. 1. pp. 301-372. (L. Reeve & Co.: London.)
Mueller, F. von (1873). Rutaceae. “Fragmcnta Phytographiae Australiae." Vol. 6. pp. 166-167. (Government Printers:
Melbourne.)
Smith-White, S. (1954). Chromosome numbers in the Boronieae (Rutaceae) and their bearing on the evolutionary
development of the tribe in the .Australian flora. Australian Journal of Botany 2: 287-303.
Stace, H.M. & Armstrong, J.W. (1992). New chromosome numbers for Rutaceae. Australian Systematic Botany 5:
501-505.
Weston, P. & Portcners, M. (1991). In: Flarden. G.J. “Flora of New South Wales.” Vol. 2. (New South Wales University
Press.- Kensington.)
Wilson, P.G. (1970). A taxonomic revision of the genera Crowea, Eriostemon and Phebalium (Rutaceae). Nuytsia
I: 5-155.
Nuytsia i2(2):289 292(1998)
289
SHORT COMMUNICATIONS
Taxonomy of Diplopeltis huegelii (Sapindaceae)
During the tloristic survey of the Swan Coastal Plain (Gibson etal. 1994) it became apparent that
species from a wide range of genera and families have variants occurring on the Tamala Limestones
near the west coast, which are distinct from those occurring on the granites and laterites of the Darling
Range. These variants are disjunct as there are no populations occurring in between on the Bassendean
sands and alluvial soils of the central and eastern parts of the coastal plain. Preliminary studies indicate
that many of these disjunct variants appear to be morphologically distinct at the subspecific level from
each other.
One of the species which has a distinctive limestone race is Diplopeltis huegelii. The taxonomy
of the genus Diplopeltis Endl. (Sapindaceae) was revised by George & Erdtman (1970) who divided
D. huegelii into a northern (D. huegelii var. subintegra) and southern (D. huegelii var. huegelii) race,
based on differences in the lobing and pubescence of the leaves, but did not recognize the Darling
Range race. This taxonomy was followed by West ( 1 985).
The coastal and Darling Range races of Diplopeltis huegelii differ in the degree of lobing of the
leaves and in the inOorescence size (Figure I). They also occur on different soils, calcareous versus
loams and clays.
All three variants deserve equal recognition. Since they are geographically and ecologically
separated, with no apparent intergradation in morphology, they are best treated as subspecies, not
varieties. New combinations are required.
A key, modified from that of West (1985), to the three subspecies is presented below:
1 Leaves divided or deeply lobed, usually pubescent
2 Leaf lobes deep and almost reaching midrib along entire length
of leaf lamina. Inflorescence compact subsp. huegelii
2. Leaf lobes mostly shallow, only the basal ones deep. Inflorescence
branches loose subsp. lehmannii
1 . Leaves entire or shortly lobed near apex, pubescent only on margins
and midrib, sometimes glabrous subsp. subintegra
Diplopeltis huegelii Endl. subsp. huegelii
Leaves divided or deeply lobed, the lobes almost reaching to midrib along entire length of
lamina, usually sparsely pubescent on all surfaces. Inflorescence compact, few-branched, usually
10-15(25) cm long. (Figure 1 A, B)
Distribution and habitat. Occurs on near-coastal limestone soils between Dongara and Mandurah.
290
Nuytsia Vol. 12, No. 2 (1998)
Diplopeltis hiiegelii subsp. lehmannii (Miq.) Keighery, comb, et stat. nov.
Diplopeltis lehmannii Miq. (Miqucl 1845; 224). Type: Darling Range, Western Australia, 9 August
1839, L. Preiss 1282 (holo: W n.v., photograph seen; iso: MEL).
Leaves distinctly lobed hut the lobes mostly shallow, only deeply divided at base, usually
pubescenlonly along margins of the leaves. //;//ore.?ceHceloose, open,uplo30crnlong. (Figure IC,D)
Specimens e.xamined (all PERTH). WESTERN AUSTRALIA: Red Hill, T.E.H. Aplin 285, 3 1 6, 323;
Badgingarra, J.S. Heard 1864; Forrestfield, R.J. Cranfield 176, 896; Karalee, C.F. Davies 748;
Serpentine National Park, B. Evans 87; Bullsbrook, Nov. 1961, C.A. Gardner s.n.. New Noreia,
C.A. Gardner%b'&A\ SW of Eneabba, A. 5. 9623; Serpentine Falls, I Nov. 197(1, A. S. George
.v.n.; Darling Range, 21 Oct. 1897, R. //c/m.v.v./t.; Arrowsmith River, Drummonds Crossing, R. Johnson
3339; 37 km E of Fitzgerald River crossing on Ravensthorpe to Esperancc Road, 29 Oct. 1972,
G.J. Keighery s.n.: 60 mile peg on Toodyay to Goomalling road, K.F. Kenneally 201; Wooroloo,
M. Koch 1448; Maddington, l5Sep. 1909, A. Afom'.von i.n.; Wongan Hills, R. Ro/jcr/j 682; Cut Hill,
York, 15 (Jet. 1922, (J. S’urgc/ir.v.//.; Swan View, 25 (Jet. 1900, A Morrison s.n. \Re.dW\\\, R. Spiijit
6965, 7179.
Distribution and habitat. This subspecies extends from the Arrowsmith River, inland to York and south
to Serpentine on granite, clay or lateritic soils. Apparently isolated populations occur at Karalee near
Southern Cross (C. F. Davies 748) and east of Ravensthorpe {G.J. Keighery s.n. ). These are remarkably
disjunct from all other populations and require re-collecting to determine their pre.scnce and/or status.
Notes. Several northern collections of this subspecies {R. Johnson 3339 and A.S. George 9623) were
previously listed as intermediates between subsp. huegelii and subsp. subintegra. A large number of
collections held in PERTH of this subspecies are cited, to enable duplicates of these collections
elsewhere to be rletermined.
Diplopeltis huegelii subsp. subintegra (A.S. George) Keighery, stat. nov.
Diplopeltis huegelii var. subintegra A.S. George (George & Erdtman 1 970: 102). Type: 2 miles [3 km]
westof Eradu on Geraldton to Mullewaroad, Western Australia, E. M. Scymgeour 1446 {holo: PERTH
01598287).
Leaves entire or shortly lobed near apex, pubescent only on margins and midrib or sometimes
glabrous. Inflorescence compact, usually less than 5 cm long.
Distribution and habitat. Occurs on sands between the Murchison River and Geraldton.
Acknowledgements
The curators of MEf. and W allowed the author to examine or borrow photographs of type
collections of Diplopeltis
GJ. Keighcry, Taxonomy of Diplopellis huegetii
291
Figure 1. A,B. Diplopellis huegelii siibsp. huegelii. A - flowering branch. B - leaf.; C,D. D. huegelii subsp.
lehmemnii. C - flowering branch. D - leaf .Scale bar = 10 nun. Drawn from GJ. Keighery 15324 (A.B) and
T.E.H. Aplin 316 (C.D).
292
Nuytsia Vol. 12, No. 2 (1998)
References
Gibson, N., Keighery, B.J., Keighory, G.J., Burbidge, A H. & Lyons, M.N. (1994). A Floristic Survey of the Southern
Swan Coastal Plain. Unpublished Report for the Australian Heritage Commission prepared by Department of
Conservation and Land Management and the Conservation Council of Western Australia (Inc.).
George, A.S. & Erdiman, G, (1970). A revision of the genus Diplopeltis Endl. (Sapindaceae). Grana PalynoUif’ica 9:
92-109.
Miquel, F.A.G. (1845). Sapindaceae Juss. In: Lehmann, “Plantae Preissianae.” Vol. 1. pp. 223-224. (Meissner:
Hamburg.)
West, J.G, (1985). Diplnpelti.s. In: “Flora of Australia." Vol. 25. pp. 101-109. (Australian Government Publishing
Service: Canberra.)
G.J. Keighery
Department oF Conservation and Land Management, Western Australian Wildlife Research Centre,
PO Box 5 1 , Wanneroo, Western Australia 6065.
Nuytsia 12 ( 2 ): 293 - 295 ( 1998 )
293
A new subspecies of Grevillea variifolia (Proteaceae)
During a floristic survey of the limestone hills and outcrops forming Cape Range peninsula in
Western Australia (Keighery & Gibson 1993), it became apparent that Grevillea variifolia contains
two distinct leaf variants that are geographically separated. The type form occurs on the massive
Tertiary limestones of Cape Range. The other occurs south and cast of the Range on the Pleistocene
limestones of the Rough Range and the Quaternary calcarenitc ridges between Coral Bay and Cape
Cuvier, where the climate is more arid (Keighery and Gibson 1993). Plants from these low outcrops
have smaller, harder leaves with pungent triangular points rather than broad shallow lobing between
the more numerous points of leaves from Cape Range. These variants areconsidered to be morphologically
and geographically distinct and are worthy of taxonomic recognition.
In their comprehensive treatment of the genus Grevillea, Olde & Marriott (1995a, b) foreshadowed
the taxonomic recognition of geographic leaf variants in Grevillea acuaria F. Muell. ex Benth.,
G. nudiflora Mcisn., G. oiicogyiie Diels and G. pectinata R. Br., without noting rank. They did
recognize geographic leaf variants in Grevillea apiciloba F. Muell., G. hiformis Meisn., G. ciirviloba
McGill , 6’. dUlymobotrya, G. diversifaliuMcisn., G. mcinglesii (Gralvdm) Planch., G. naiiaC.A. Gardner,
G. patentiloba F. Muell., G. pauciflora R.Br., G. rigida Olde & Marriott, G. sarisa S. Moore,
G. shultleworthiana Meisn. and G. thyrsoidesMcisn. at the subspecies level. In only one case, did they
treat a leaf form as a separate species, distinguishing Grevillea evanescens Olde & Marriott from
G. obtusifolia Meisn. They saw only limited material of Grevillea variifolia and commented (Olde &
Marriott 1995b: 217) that the species showed "some variation in leaf size, shape, degree of division
and colour”. Therefore, since geographic variation in leaf characters appears widespread in the genus
and is usually accorded subspecies rank, this rank is adopted here.
Taxonomy
Grevillea variifolia C. A. Gardner & A. S. George, J. Roy. Soc. VP. Australia 46: 1 29-130 ( 1 963). Type:
Cape Range, near number 3 well, 2 June 1961 , A.S. George 2477 (holo: PERTH 1 137859).
Grevillea variifolia C. A. Gardner & A.S. George subsp. variifolia
Mature leaves with a petiole 3-6 mm long; lamina usually oblanceolate to narrowly cuneate,
17-43 mm long (usually greater than 25 mm), 15-22 mm wide; apex usually obtuse, rarely acute or
pungent with 3-7 subsidiary points.
Other specimens examined. WESTERN AUSTRALIA: Cape Range, 1 8 Aug. 1 956, K. MeWhae s.n.
(PERTH); Charles Knife Rd, Cape Range, A.S. George 1 340 (PERTH); Charles Knife Rd, Cape Range,
Hj.Eichler225ii \ (AD.PERTH); VlamingHead,/!.^. George 1369 (PERTH); Cape Range, W.Rogerson
424, 297 (PERTH); I mile| 1 .6kml S ofVlamingHead, A.S. George 2577 (PERTH); Walk trail between
Shothole Canyon and Charles Knife Rd, S. Moore 217 (PERTH); Cape Range, H. Deinarz 5789
(PERTH); Sandy Bay, Learmonth track, T. Tapper 1 0 (PERTH); 200 m N of Milyering Visitors Centre,
Cape Range, R. Karniewicz 007 (PERTH); Mandu Mandu Gorge, G.J. Keighery 12858 (PERTH).
Distribution and habitat. North-west Western Australia in the Carnarvon Botanical District. Confined
to the massive Tertiary limestones of the Cape Range.
294
Nuytsia Vol. 12, No. 2 (1998)
Conservation status. Many populations in Cape Range National Park.
Flowering period. June to September.
Grevillea variifolia subsp. bundera G.J. Keighery, suhsp. nov.
A Grevillea variifolia affinis dilTcrt a foliis duris, lobis triangularibus, lobis pungentibus.
Typus: 15.6 km north of Coral Bay turnoff on Exmouth Road, Western Australia, 25 August 1992,
G.J. Keighery & N. Gibson 323 (PERTH 040552 17).
Mature leaves with a petiole c. 2 mm long; lamina normally triangular, I 1-15 mm long, to 8 mm
wide, rigid, with up to 5 lobes, each lobe with a pungent rnucrone 2-4 mm long. (Figure 1)
Figure 1. Grevillea variifoHu subsp. bundera. A - llowcring branch, B - leaf, C - flower. Scale bar = 10 mm. Drawn
from the type population, voucher G.J. Keifiheiy & N. Gih.son .^2.3.
G.J. Keighery, A new subspecies of Grevillea variifoUa
295
Other specimens examined . WESTERN AUSTRALIA: WarrooraTrack, //. Demarz 1 1758 (Kings Park,
PERTH); 79 miles 1 127 km] S ofLcarmonlh, George 2404 (PERTH); Learmonth Road, 22 miles
[35 km] N orWaiTooratiirnol l', A .S'. George 3286 (PERTH); Gnaraloo, G ready 4 (PERTH)-, 60 kin N of
North West Coastal Highway on Exmoulh Road, E. Wittwer 1756 (KPBG, PERTH); 15 miles [24 km]
N of Warroora I urnoff, J. S. Beard 2530 ( KPBG, PERTH); Rough Range, G.J. Keighery & N. Gibson 300
(PERTH).
Distribution and habitat. North-west Western Australia in the Carnarvon Botanical District. Confined
to Quaternary Bundera calcarenites and Pleistocene limestones (Rough Range), usually overlain by
recent red sand between Cape Cuvier and Rough Range.
Conservation .status. Widespread and probably not in danger, but is not known from any conservation
reserve.
Flowering period. May to September, with one collection in April. When surveyed in April 1996 no
plants were flowering; Howering may depend on cyclonic rain.
Etymology. Named after the Quaternary Bundera calcarenites to which this taxon is a common and
distinctive component of the shrub llora.
References
Gardner, C.A. & George, A.,S. ( 1 963). liight new plants front Western Australia. Journal of the Royal Society of We.'tlern
Australia 46: 129-138.
Keighery, G..1. & Gibson. N. (1993). Biogeograpliy and composition of the llora of Cape Range Peninsula, Western
Atistralia. In. Hurnphries, W.K. (ed.). The Biogeography of Cape Range, Western Australia, Records of the Western
Australian Museum. Suppleincnt 4-S. pp. .S1-8.S.
Olde, P. & MamoU, N, (199.Sa). "The Grevillea Book.” Vol. 2. (Kangaroo Press: Kenthurst, New South Wales.)
Okie, P. & Marriott. N. (199.66). “The Grevillea Book.” Vol. 3. (Kangaroo Press: Kenthurst, New South Wales.)
G.J. Keighery
Department of Conservation and Land Management, Wildlife Research Centre, PO Box 5 1 , Wanneroo,
Western Australia 6065.
296
Nuytsia Vol. 12. No. 2 (1998)
Nuytsia i2(2):297-300(1998)
297
Two new synonyms in the genus Pityrodia
(Lamiaceae subfamily Chloanthoideae)
In a revision of the genus Pityrodia R. Br. (Lamiaceae subfamily Chloanthoideae) by Munir ( 1 979),
the following five new names were published for taxa that occur in Western Australia: Pityrodia
augustensis Munir, P. chorisepala, P. glabra, P. glutinosa and P. ovata. All of Munir’s descriptions
of these new taxa were based on very limited material. Subsequent collections have increased the
number of specimens available for study , providing a much better basis for assessing the morphological
variation and taxonomic status of these taxa. Since they are still known from relatively few collections,
all of these taxa currently have conservation priority.
During identification of material fora llora survey of the Shark Bay area (Trudgen & Keighery 1 995),
it was discovered that Pityrodia glabra and P. glutinosa are synonymous. A recent examination of
herbarium material from the northern arid zone of Western Australia has shown thatP. chorisepala and
P. ovata are also synonymous. In each case the two names were published simultaneously, so neither
has priority. This paper reduces P. glabra and P. ovata to synonymy.
Recent collections of Pityrodia augustensis have confirmed that it is a very morphologically
distinct species with an extremely restricted range. This species has been adequately surveyed and is
now classed as Declared Rare.
Taxonomy
Pityrodia chorisepala Munir (Munir 1979:63-65). Type: South of Mongrel Downs Station, Northern
Territory, 4 August 1976, P.K. Latz 6543 (holo: AD, n.v., illustration seen; iso: see notes below, n.v.).
Pityrodia ovataMun'u'iMun'n 1919: 1 18-120). Type: 10 miles [16 km] west of McLarty Hill oil camp.
Western Australia, 4 July 1968, J.S. Beard 5686 {halo: PERTH 00999733; iso: PERTH 00999741).
Illustrations. The holotype of Pityrodia chorisepala is illustrated in Figure 19 and the holotype of
its synonym P. ovata in Figure 37 of Munir (1979).
Other specimens examined (■dW'P'EKYYi). WESTERN AUSTRALIA: Site2 (18" 55' S, 123"14'E), near
Edgar Range, 9 Aug. 1976, K.F. Kenneally 5560; Site 1 (18" 53' S, 123" 43' E), near Edgar Range,
12 Aug. 1976, K.F. Kenneally 5606.
NORTHERN TERRITORY : 12 miles [ 19 km] W of Sandy Blight Junction, 26 July 1967,^.5. George
8921.
Distribution. Occurs in the far south of the Northern Botanical Province and in the north of theEremean
Botanical Province of Western Australia, extending c. 600 km from near Edgar Range east to the
Western Australian border, and also extending slightly into Northern Territory.
Habitat. Recorded in red sand, on dunes or spinifex plains, with one record {J.S. Beard 5686) of the
habitat as ‘tree steppe’.
298
Nuytsia Vol. 12, No. 2 (1998)
Phenology. Flowers and fruits recorded July to August.
Consen’ution .status. CALM Conservation Codes for Western Australian Flora: Priority Two. Known
from three localities in Western Australia and two in Northern Territory. This species has a fairly wide
range of over 600 km in a remote area where there is little botanical collecting, so may occur at many
more locations than are presently known. It was reported to be rare at one of the Northern Territory
locations but there is no indication of population size for any of the Western Australian specimens.
Notes. Isotypes of Piiyrodia cliorisepala are cited (Munir 1979: 63) for AD, CANB, NT and PERTH
but no specimen has been lodged in the type collection at PERTH to date. Munir based his description
of Pityrodia chorisepula on two specimens from Northern Territory and that of P. ovata on a single
collection from Western Australia. Two additional specimens collected from west and east of Edgar
Range were seen later by Munir, who annotated the western one as P. cliorisepala and the eastern one
as P. ovata in 1980. It was evident from these extra collections that both taxa occurred in Western
Australia and that their geographic ranges overlapped.
Munir (1979: 120) indicated that Pityrodia ovata was very similar to P. cliorisepala but differed
in “its leaves being honey-combed underneath, not contracted at the base, covered all over with short
gland-tipped hairs; leaves and inflorescence lax, not crowded towards the apex; pedicel short, ± 1 mm
long; calyx-lobes obtuse with rounded lip”. The only consistent difference found in the current study
was that all the leaves of specimens annotated by Munir as P. ovata have an indumentum predominantly
of short simple glandular hairs, with non-glandular dendritic hairs restricted to the veins and margins,
whereas in specimens annotated as P. cliorisepala only the upper ‘floral’ leaves have this type of
indumentum and the lower leaves are densely covered throughout by non-glandular dendritic hairs.
Consequently the leaves of P. ovata specimens lend to show the veins more clearly on the undersurface.
Both groups of specimens have leaves contracted at the base into a very short petiole, both have the
calyx lobes varying from obtuse to acute, and there is no difference between them in the degree of laxity
of the leaves and innorescences. The single character difference of leaf indumentum is not sufficient
to maintain the two taxa as distinct species.
Pityrodia cliorisepala is chosen here, in preference to P. ovata as the name for this species, partly
because it has been more widely used and partly because it appears to be a more suitable name. One
of the specimens (K.F. Kenneally 5560) has the leaves mostly obovate rather than ovate, so use of the
epithet ovata could be misleading.
Although the corolla appears glabrous outside, all specimens have a few minute simple glandular
hairson the lobes. Flower colour isrecorded for one of the specimens (WF. 5560) as “white
with red spots in throat”, while two other records only mention the white colour.
Pityrodia gliitinosa Munir (Munir 1979: 84-86). Type: About 175 km north of Geraldton, Western
Australia, 2 October 1966, E.A. Shaw 608 {holo: AD, n.v., illustration seen; iso: PERTH 01608320).
P(r)’rwfm);/a/?n(Munir(Munir 1979:51-54). Ty/re.' 7 miles [ 1 1 kmlalongTamalaroadfromHamelin-
Denham road. Western Australia, 26 August 1969, A.S. George 9561 (holo: PERTH 00999725; iso:
AD, n.v.).
B.L. Rye &, M.E. Trudgen, New synonyms in the genus Pityrodia
299
Illustrations. The hololypc oF Pityrodia glutinosa is illustrated in Figure 26 and a specimen of its
synonym P. glabra in Figure 15 of Munir (1979).
Otlierspecimcns e.xainined (MPERTH). WESTERN AUSTRALIA:200muptracktoN of Useless Loop
road, 8.7 km W of Dcnham-IIamelin road, 22 Aug. 1991, A.H. Burbidge 4636; SE of Coolcalalaya
Station, beside Slate Barrier Fence, 1 8,5 km SE of gas pipeline, 28 Aug. 1 990, A.H. Burbidge 4791;
c. 50 miles [ 80 km | N of Mary Springs Home.stead, North West Coastal Highway, 14 Sep. 1 960, S. Davies-,
8 km on Tamala road, 28 Aug. 1985. H. Demarz 10685; 39 km N of Murchison bridge, 7 Aug. 1987,
H. Demarz 1 1754; 135 km N of Northampton, 14 July 1964,7). W. Gondall 1 195;c. 30 km NW of Tamala
homestead, 20 July 1 988, G.J. Keighery & J.J. Alford 2007; 8.8 km W along Useless Loop road from
Denhain-Hamclin road, 23 Aug. 1 994, G.J. Keighery & N. Gibson 1 273; 425 mile peg on North West
Coastal Highway [ I 82 km N of Gcraldton], 3 Nov. 1965, F. Lullfitz 4331 ; 436 miles on North West
Coastal Highway [200 km N of Geraldton], 2 Oct. 1966, E.M. Sciymgeour 1476.
Distribution. Occurs in the far north of the South West Botanical Province of Western Australia,
extending from Nanga Station south-east to west of Lake Nerramyne Station,
Habitat. Pityrodia glutinosa occurs in a shrub layer often dominated by txEiicalyptus mallee woodland
or sometimes by Calothamiuis. The northern populations, from Nanga Station, are from red sandy soil
over limestone, in a habitat known as the Tamala System (Beard 1976), while the southernmost
population near Lake Nerramyne Station is recorded on a slightly elevated flat with orange sand. No
habitat details are recorded for the intermediate populations except for one specimen collected from
a sand dune.
Phenology. Flowers and fruits recorded July to November.
Conservation status. CALM Conservation Codes For Western Australian Flora: Priority Three. Known
from at least eight localities over a range of c. 190 km, but not from any conservation reserves.
Notes. Although Pityrodia glabra and P. glutinosa were named in the same publication, no direct
comparison was made between them except in the key, where they were separated at couplet 28 on the
basis of leaf characters, the leaves described as “sessile, entire, slightly recurved along the distal
margins” for P. glutinosa and ‘ subsessilc, distally dentate, Hat” for P. glabra (Munir 1 979: 9). In the
illustration (Figure 26) provided Ibi P. glutinosa, the leaves appear to be subsessile and dentate,
although not as prominently dentate as some of the leaves illustrated (Figure 15) for P. glabra. An
examination of the herbarium specimens has revealed that the mature leaves are shortly petiolate and
dentate in both taxa and the degree to which the margins arc recurved depends partly on how well the
specimens have been pressed.
Pityrodia glutinosa is chosen here as the name to use for this species, rather than P. glabra, because
it has been applied to the majority of the specimens and because the epithet glutinosa is more accurately
descriptive for the taxon than is the epithet glabra.
300
Nuytsia Vol. 12, No. 2 (1998)
References
Beard, J.S. (1976). “The Vegetation of the Shark Bay and Edel Area." (Vegmap Publications: Perth.)
Munir, A, A. (1979). A taxonomic revision of the genus Pitymdia (Chloanthaceae). Journal of the Adelaide Botanic
Gardens 2: 1-138.
Trudgen, M.E. & Keigliery, G.J. (1995). Flora of the Shark Bay World Fleritage Area and environs. Unpublished
Report for the Australian fleritage Commission.
B.L. Rye
Western Australian Herbarium, Department ol Conservation and Land Management, Locked Bag 104,
Bentley Delivery Centre, Western Australia 6983
M.E. Trudgen
C/- Western Australian Herbarium, Department of Conservation and Land Management, Locked Bag
104, Bentley Delivery Centre, Western Australia 6983
Nuylsia 1 2(2):301-302(1998)
301
Status and identification of Goodenia filiformis (Goodeniaceae)
Goode nia filiform is R.Br. (Goodeniaceae), a small erect to ascending herb from the south-west of
Western Austral ia, has for a nu mber of years been confused with G. pulchella Benth This communication
highlights information useful in distinguishing between the two taxa, alleviating confusion in
previous treatments.
Carolin’s (1992) treatment of Goodenia in the “Flora of Australia” has G. filiformis as known only
from the type collection, collected by Robert Brown in 1801 “between Princess Royal Harbour and
[West] Cape Howe, near King George Sound”. After receiving the type collection from the British
Museum (BM), the authors have determined that seven specimens housed under the name G. pulchella
at the Western Australian Herbarium (PERTH) are in fact G. filiformis ‘.All of the specimens originate
from the vicinity of Albany, the same area as where the type was collected. Goodenia filiformis and
G. pulchella seem to both commonly occur in winter- wet depressions, but G. pulchella has amuch wider
range (Figure 1).
OfthescvcnspecimensofC. /i/ifbmiAcun cntly in the Western Australian Herbarium (PERTH) only
one is from a nature reserve (Millbrook Nature Reserve north of Albany). This means that the species
should be considered for Priority Three listing, as Poorly Known Taxa. Further fieldwork will be
required to determine the exact range of G. filiformis.
o
0
\ o3
0
X Goodenia filiformis
0 Goodenia pulchella
0
PERTH
0
° 0
0
o -.0 . ■ '
^'ALBANY
60 0 60 120 180 Kilometers
t=zd 1 — -3—=)
Figure I. Distribution of G. Jilifonms anti G. pulchella in the south-west of Western Australia.
R.C. Carolin (1992) did not examine the material the authors have determined as Goodenia filiformis.
302
Nuytsia Vol. 12, No. 2 (1998)
Table I shows (he principal morphological differences distinguishing G. filiformis and
G. pulchella. Key indicators, which are height, leaf and sepal shape combined with geographic
restriction, separate the taxa.
Table 1. Principal morphological features distinguishing Goodenia filiformis and G. pulchella.
G. filiformis
G. pulchella
Height
to 25 cm
to 35 cm
Leaves
shape
linear-terete
narrowly ovate
margin
entire
entire to crenate-dentate
width
c. 1 mm
greater than 1 mm
Sepals
shape
ovate
narrowly oblong
length
1 .5-2 mm
2-3 mm
Indusium
c. 0.7 mm long
0.8-1 mm long
The “Flora of the Perth Region”, pre dating Carolin’s ( 1992) treatment, contains an illustration
(Marchant et al. 1 987) of a plant under the name G. filiformis. Unfortunately the illustration does not
include the basal leaves, making identification difficult. As most illustrations for the flora were drawn
from fresh material collected in the region, and the sepals are narrowly oblong, the specimen used is
mast likely G. pulchella.
References
Carotin, R.C. (1992). Gmidenia. In: “Hora of Au.stialia.” Vol. 35. pp. 147-281. (Australian Government Publishing
Service: Canbeira.)
Marchant, N.G.. Wheeler. J.R., Rye, B.L., Bennett, Fi.M., Lander. N.S. & MacFarlane, T.D. (1987). “Flora of the Perth
Region.” Part 2. (Western Australian Herbariinn: South Perth.)
L.W. Sage
C/- Western Australian Herbarium, Department of Conservation and Land Management, Locked
Bag 104, Bentley Delivery Centre, Western Australia 6983.
J.P. Pigott
Western Australian Herbarium, Dcparlinent of Conservation and Land Management, Locked Bag 104,
Bentley Delivery Centre, Western Australia 6983.
Nuytsiu 12 ( 2 ): 303 - 305 ( 1998 )
303
The name Leptorhynchos linearis and the type of Leptorhynchos
(Asteraceae)
The generic name Leptorhynchos Less. (Asteraceae) was based on two species names, L. squamatus
(Labill.) Less, and L. linearis Less. These two names as currently circumscribed have been applied to
species that are sufficiently different as to question their being congeneric. Since both names have,
at different times, been proposed as type of the genus their correct application is of particular
importance.
History
When Christian Lessing (1832) described the genus Leptorhynchos he included two taxa,
L. squamatus and L. linearis. The former name was based on Chrysocoma squamata Labill.
(Labillardicre 1 805) [incorrectly cited as Conyza squamata], a species found by Labillardiere on the
south coast of Tasmania; there is no doubt about the application of this name since it was adequately
described and illustrated and an isotype is pre.senl in Australia (MEL 1543432). The latter name was
based on a specimen present in the herbarium of C.S. Kunth that had been collected by C. Gaudichaud-
Beaupre at Port Jackson, Sydney, New South Wales. Lessing’s description of L. linearis was very brief
and due to a typographical error indicated that the leaves were only 1 Vi" [lines] long (c. 3 mm) an error
repeated by de Candolle (1838) while it was evidently intended to state that they were IV 2 ' [inches]
long (c. 36 mm).
Kunth died in 1850 and his herbarium passed to the state herbarium in Berlin (Staflcu & Cowan
1979). Here the type of L. linearis was seen by O.W. Sonder who considered that it was conspecific
with L. squamatus and who published the new combination L. squamatus var. linearis (Less.) Sond.
(Sonder 1 853: 500). He stated that he had seen the specimen of L. linearis in the Berlin herbarium that
had been earlier examined by Lessing (“Coinpar. spec. Lessingian. in herb. Berol.”).
George Bentham (1867), in writing up the genus Leptorhynchos for the “Flora Australiensis”,
overlooked Sender’s comment and synonymy and applied the name L linearis in the sense of
L. niticlulus DC. (de Candolle 1838) while the latter name he incorrectly placed in synonymy under
L. squamatus.
Ferdinand Mueller evidently had doubts about Bentham’s treatment of these species for he appears
to have written to Prof. A.W. Eichler in Berlin requesting information on the type of L. linearis. Eichler
passed the request to Paul Ascherson who was professor of botany in the University of Berlin. A copy
of Ascherson’s reply to Mueller (dated 3 May 1 880) isatlached to asheet of L. squamatus in the National
Herbarium, Melbourne (sheet MEL 248910). The essence of Ascherson’s letter is that the only
specimen of L. linearis in the Berlin herbarium is that of the type of the name and that it was identical
to a specimen of L. squamatus collected by Ferdinand Mueller at Port Phillip in 1876. Ascherson
returned to Mueller a portion of this Port Phillip collection and also sent several achenes that were
extracted from the the type of L. linearis in Berlin. These achenes are in a packet labelled “Achanen
vonOriginalexpl. [Exemplar] von L. ///if'c/mLc.ss,” which is also mounted on sheet MEL 248910; they
have the same morphology as those found in the type of L. squamatus and are di fferent from those found
in L. niticlulus. in particular in the size, shape, and den.sity of the teeth towards the ba.se of the pappus
bristles (see Figure 1 ). .Since the Berlin Herbarium was largely de.stroyed in the war of 1939-1945, the
loose achenes on sheet MEL 2489 1 0 are presumably all that remain of the type of L. linearis.
304
Nuytsia Vol. 12, No. 2 (1998)
Figure 1. A-C. Lcptorhynchos squainatus. A - achene wilh pappus. B - achene with enlargement of papilla.
C - pappus bristle. D-F’. Leplorhyncitos nitiduliis. D - achene with pappus. E - achene with enlargement of
papilla. F - pappus bristle. A-C from E. Gtiuba (CANB 015420); D-F from R. Melville 2854 (MEL).
This information, and his own recognition of the correct application of the name L. nitiduliis,
evidently led Mueller to adopt the name L. nitiduliis in place of L linearis in his “Systematic Census
of Australian Plants” ( 1 882), but without an explanation. This name change was accepted by Moore
( 1 893), Rodway ( 1 903), and Maiden & Betche (1916), all of whom assumed that both L. linearis and
L. nitidulus applied to the same species and that Ihc latter should be used (even though the former was
the first to be published), although none of these authors indicated the reasons for their actions. This
lack of documentation presumably led Ewart (1931), Curtis ( 1 963), and Willis ( 1 973) to continue with
the misapplication of the nameL. linearis, while Jacobs & Pickard ( 1981 ) and Everett (1992) followed
Maiden & Bctchc in using the name L. nitidulus, but again without an explanation.
Leptorhynchos squamatus is widespread and somewhat variable. The taxonomy of this variation
is currently being investigated by Christina Flann (MEL) and until this study has been completed a
formal recognition of infraspecific taxa would be premature.
Lectotypil'ication of Leptorhynchos
Since it is now established that the names Leptorhynchos squamatus and L. linearis apply to the
same species, lectotypification of the genus is not of such importance. However, the suggestion by
Farr et al. ( 1 979) that Pfeiffer ( 1 874) may have lectotypified it on L. squamatus can possibly not be
Paul G. Wilson, The name Leptorhynchos linearis and the type of Leptorhynchos
305
substantiated since all Pfeiffer did was to list the one species [as ‘Conyzasquamata’] under the generic
name. The first undoubted lectotypification appears to have been made by Anderberg (1991) who
chose L. linearis [= L sc/uamatus] as the type and it is this lectotypification that I am following, as did
Greutercta/. (1993).
Acknowledgement
The illustration was kindly prepared by Annemarie Wilson.
References
Anderberg, A. A. (1991). Taxonomy and phylogeny of the tribe Gnaphalieae (Asteraceae). Opera Botanica 104:
1-195.
Bentham, G. (1867). “Flora Australiensis.” Vol. 3. (L. Reeve & Co.: London.)
Curtis, W.M. (1963). “The Student's Flora of Tasmania." Part 2. (Government Printer: Hobart.)
de Candolle, A.P. (1838). "Prodromus Systematis Naturalis Regni Vegetabilis.” Vol. 6. (Treuttel & Wiirtz: Paris.)
Ewart, A.J. (1931). "Flora of Victoria.” (Government Printer: Melbourne.)
Everett, .1. (1992). In: tlarden, G.J. (ed.) “Flora of New South Wales.” Vol. 3. (University Press: Kensington.)
Farr, E.R., Leussink. J.A. & Stafleu, F.A. (1979). “Index Nominum Genericorum." Vol. 2. (Bohn, Scheltema &
Holkcma: Utrecht.)
Greuter, W. et al. (1993). "Names in Cunent Use for Extant Plant Genera.” (Koeltz: Konigstein.)
Jacobs, S-W.L. & Pickard, J. (1981). "Plants of New South Wales.” (Government Printer: Sydney.)
Labillardicre. J..I.H, dc (1805). "Novae Hollandiae Plantarum Specimen.” (Huzard: Paris.)
Lessing, C.F. (1832). “Synopsis Generum Compositarum ” (Duncker & Humbolt: Berlin.)
Maiden, J.H. & Belche, E. (1916). “A Census of New South Wales Plants.” (Government Printer: Sydney.)
Moore, C. (1893). "A Handbook of the Flora of New South Wales." (Government Printer: Sydney.)
Mueller, F.J.H, (1882). “Systematic Census of Australian Plants." (Government Printer: Melbourne.)
Pfeiffer, L.K.G (1874). “Nomendator Botanicus.” Vol. 2. (Fischer: Cassel.)
Rodway. L. (1903). “The Tasmanian Flora.” (Government Printer: Hobart.)
Sender, O.W. (1853;. Leptorhynchos. Linmieo 25: 500-503.
Stafleu, F.A, & Cowan, R.S. (1979). "Taxonomic Literature.” 2nd edn. Vol. 2. (Bohn, Scheltema & Holkema: Utrecht.)
Willis, J.H, (1973). “A Handbook lo Plants of Victoria." Vol. 2. (Melbourne University Press: Carlton.)
Paul G. Wilson
Western Australian Herbarium, Department of Conservation and Land Management, Locked Bag 1 04,
Bentley Delivery Centre, Western Australia 6983.
306
Nuytsia Vol. 12, No. 2 (1998)
CONSERVATION CODES FOR WESTERN AUSTRALIAN FLORA
R: Declared Rare Flora - Extant Taxa (= Threatened Flora = Endangered + Vulnerable)
Taxa which have been adequately .searched for, and arc deemed to be in the wild either rare, in
danger of extinction, or otherwise in need of special protection, and have been gazetted as such,
following approval by the Minister for the Environment, after recommendation by the State's
Endangered Flora Consultative Committee.
X: Declared Rare Flora - Presumed Extinct Taxa
Taxa which have not been collected, or otherwise verified, over the past 50 years despite thorough
searching, or of which all known wild populations have been destroyed more recently, and have
been gazetted as such, following approval by the Minister for the Environment, after
recommendation by the State's Endangered Flora Consultative Committee.
1: Priority One - Poorly Known Taxa
Taxa which are known from one ora few (generally <5) populations which are under threat, either
due to small population size, or being on lands under immediate threat, c.g. road verges, urban
areas, farmland, active mineral leases, etc., or the plants are under threat, e.g. from disease,
grazing by feral animals, etc. May include taxa with threatened populations on protected lands.
Such taxa are under consideration for declaration as 'rare flora', but arc in urgent need of further
survey.
2; Priority Two - Poorly Known Taxa
'I'axa which are known from one or a few (generally <5) populations, at least some of which are
not believed to be under immediate threat (i.e. not currently endangered). Such taxa are under
consideration for declaration as 'rare llora', but are in urgent need of further survey.
3: Priority Three - Poorly Known Taxa
Taxa which are known from several populations, at least some of which are not believed to be
under immediate threat (i.e. not currently endangered). Such taxa arc under consideration for
declaration as 'rare flora', but are in need of further survey.
4: Priority Four - Rare Taxa
Taxa w'h.ich are considered to have been adequately surveyed and which, whilst being rare (in
Australia), are not currently threatened by any identifiable factors. These taxa require monitoring
every 5- 1 0 years.
Publication date for Nuytsia Volume 12 Number 1: 17 February 1998
Nuytsia 12(2):307(1998)
307
Notes for Authors
The aim of Nuytsia is to publish original papers on syslcmalic botany with preference given to papers relating
to the flora of Western Australia, All papers arc refereed and the Editorial Advisory Committee reserves the right
to reject papers. Opinions expressed by authors are their own and do not necessarily represent the policies or views
of the Department of Conservation and Land Management.
After final acceptance of papers, authors are requested to provide discs readable directly by IBM computer or
internet attachments. Wherever possible, the MS-WORD software should be used. Original figures should not
be lettered but accompanied by copies indicating lettering. Page proofs will be forwarded to authors for checking.
Twenty reprints of each paper will be provided free of charge; no additional copies may be ordered.
Sty le and layout should follow recent numbers ol Nuytsia. Within a paragraph two spaces are required between
sentences; after colons, semicolons, commas and dashes a single space is required. Italics should be used for formal
taxonomic names, from the genus level down to the lowest infraspecific categories, and for collectors’ names when
citing specimens. Incidental Latin words in the text should be italicized but not the Latin diagnosis.
Title. Should include the family name ofthc genera or .species treated, but not authorities. New taxashould be named
if not too numerous. The type ol paper (e.g. revision, synopsis) and geographic areaof study should be given where
appropriate.
Structure of papers. Authors arc encouraged to use the conventional structure of scientific papers, especially when
a complete study, such as a revision, is being reported.
( \) Abstract. Should he indented and commence with bibliographic information. New taxa, combinations and
names should be listed with their authorities. The major contents of the paper should be concisely summarized but
no additional material given.
(2) Introduction. Should give some background information and state the purpose of the paper.
(3) Methods a\ Male rials and methods. May include the method ofdrawing up the description from specimens,
extent of search for types and discussion ofconcepts of taxonomic categories.
(4) /A'.TO//i- or TracJ/ir^nv or rfawnev/KL-tm/r/ne/?/ or various alternative headings as appropriate to Ihedatabeing
presented in the paper.
(3) Discussion. A discussion section should be considered, which would include some or all of the following;
a summary of the fi ndings emphasizing the most significant; interpretation ofthc results in the light of otherrelevant
work; statetnent of new problems which have arisen; advising of aspects which are to be followed up; suggestion
of topics which others might usefully pursue; prediction and speculation.
Short Communications. These are short concise contributions, usually with few or no main headings. They lack
an abstract and authors’ names and addresses are placed at the end.
Headings. All headings should be mainly in lower case, major headings centred and bold, secondary headings
(where required) left-justified and hold, and minor headings left-justified and italicized.
Keys. May be either indented (e.g. Nuytsia 1 1 : 94) orhracketcd (e.g. Nuytsia I 1:55-56). Indented keys involving
more than nine levels of indentation should be avoided. Where a key is indented, tabs should be used and not space
bars.
Species treatments. Use of certain named paragraphs, or sets of paragraphs, for matter following the descriptions
is encouraged. The desired sequence and examples of commonly used headings are shown below. Italicized
headings should be followed by text on the same line.
( I )Taxon name (in bold) and authority. For previously published taxa this should be followed by the reference,
nomenclatural .synonyms (if any) and Type: heading with full type details.
(2) Other synonyms with their type details, significant manuscript or phrase names. Recent papers should be
consulted for examples of an appropriate format for citing synonyms.
(3) Latin diagnoses (tor new taxa - not indented).
308
Nuytsiu Vol. 12, No. 2 (1998)
(4) Typus: (I’or new taxa - not indented).
(5) Engli.sh description (indented).
(6) Other specimens examined or Selected specimens examined as appropriate. The number of specimens cited
for each taxon should not exceed 20, Western Australian specimens should be cited first followed by any from other
states in the order: Northern Territory, South Australia, Queensland, New South Wales, Victoria, Tasmania. Within
each region, the specimens cited should be placed in alphabetical orderaccording to the collectors’ surnames. For
each specimen the order of the details given should be as follows: locality, date, collector’s name (in italics) and
number, herbarium (in brackets).
(7) Distribution.
(8) Habitat.
(9) Phenology or Flowering period.
( 1 0) Consen'ation status. Department of Conservation and Land Management Conservation Codes for Declared
Rare and Priority Flora should be cited for any endangered or rare Western Australian plants.
(11) Etymology.
( 1 2) Typificatlon.
(13) Affinities.
(14) Notes or Discussion or Comments.
Thrcatetied species. The Department ofConscrvation and Limd Management has a policy not to publish precise locality
data for threatened species. When describing threatened taxa authors are therefore requested to use generalized
localities accompanied by the bracketed statement | precise locality withheld].
Standard abbreviations. When abbreviations arc used, the following standards should be followed.
( 1 ) Author abbreviations, F'ollow Brummitt, R.K. & Powell, C.E. (1992). “Authors of Plant Names.” (Royal
Botanic Gardens: Kew.).
(2) Book titles. These should not be abbreviated in the references but any literature citations in the text should
follow Green, J.W. (1985). "Censusof the Vascular Plants of Western Australia.” 2nd edn. pp, 20-24. (Department
of Agriculture: Penh.). A more complete list of book title abbreviations is given in Stalfeu, F.A. & Cowan, R.S.
(1976-83). ■'Taxonomic Literature. ’’2nd edn. (Bohn.Scheltema&Holkema: Utrecht.), butcapital initial letters need
to be used in Niiytsia.
(3) Journal titles. FollowLawrence.G.II.M.etfl/. (1968). “B-P-H. Botanico-Periodicum-Huntianum.”(Hunt
Botanical Library: Pittsburgh.)
(4) Dates and directions. Generally should not be abbreviated except under the Specimens examined section.
In that section, dates should be written in full only if they have less than five letters (e.g. July), otherwise should be
shortened to the fi rst three letters and astop (e.g. Oct.), while compass directions should be abbreviated to capital letters
with no slops (e.g. N and SSW).
(5) Ollier abbreviations. Standard abbreviations fur measurements (e.g. mm), Latin abbreviations (e.g. c’., nom.
illeg.). mountains and roads (e.g. Mt Koscuisko, Brooke Rd) are used in Nuytsia. Other abbreviations, especially
ones that arc ambiguous (e.g. Pt), should be avoided.
Figures. Numbers should follow a single sequence including maps.
References. Citation of references in the texl should give the author's surname and date (e.g. Smith 1 963) and full
details should be given in the reference section. This format is also recommended to replace the traditional
abbreviations for references listed under taxonomic names, forexampleusing Benth. (Bentham 1878: 234) rather
than Benth., FI. Austral. 7: 234 ( 1878).
New species and nomenclatural changes in
Pbebalium and related genera (Rutaceae).
By Paul G. Wilson
267
Short Communications
Taxonomy of Diplopeltis huegelii (Sapindaceae).
By GJ. Keighery
289
A new subspecies of Grevillea variifolia (Proteaceae).
By GJ. Keighery
293
Two new synonyms in the genus Pityrodia
(Lamiaceae subfamily Chloanthoideae).
By B.L. Rye and M.E. Trudgen
297
Status and identification of
Coodenia filiformis (Goodeniaceae).
By L.W. Sage and J.P. Pigott
301
The name Leptorhynchos linearis
and the type of Leptorhynchos (Asteraceae).
By Paul G. Wilson
303
Conservation Codes for Western Australian Flora
307
Publication date of Nuytsia Volume 1 2 Number 1
307
Notes for Authors
308
4346 - 0198-600
Dedication to Paul Graham Wilson.
By N.G. Marchant
161
Beaufortia aestiva (Myrtaceae): a new species from
the northern kwongan of the
South-West Botanical Province, Australia.
By K.J. Brooks, A.A. Burbidge and A.S. George
163
Sphaerolobium pubescens and Sphaerolobium rostratum
(Leguminosae: MIrbelieae), new species from
Western Australia.
By R. Butcher
171
Brachyloma nguba (Epacridaceae), a new species
from the south-west of Western Australia.
By R.J. Cranfield
179
Xantbosia eichleri, a new species of Apiaceae
from Western Australia.
By J.M. Hart and M.J. Henwood
185
Notes on the genus Lepidium (Brassicaceae) in Western
Australia, Including recognition
of a new species, L. amelum.
By B.J. Lepschi
191
Three new triggerplant species in Stylidium subgenus
Centridium (Stylidiaceae) from Western Australia.
By A. Lowrie and K.F. Kenneally
197
A taxonomic revision of Dicrastylis sect. Dicrastylis
(Lamiaceae subfamily Chloanthoideae).
By B.L. Rye and M.E. Trudgen
207
Anthofium odontophyllum (Goodeniaceae), a new
species from Western Australia.
By L.W. Sage
229
New subspecies of Goodenia drummondii and G. laevis
(Goodeniaceae) from the south-west of Western Australia.
By L.W. Sage
233
A taxonomic review of the genera Eriostemon
and Philotheca (Rutaceae; Boronieae).
By Paul G. Wilson
239
(Contents continued inside back cover)
ISSN 0085-4417
Print Post Approved PP665C)02/00003
Live Music
Archive
Librivox
Free Audio
Metropolitan Museum
Cleveland
Museum of Art
Internet
Arcade
Console Living Room
Open Library
American
Libraries
TV News
Understanding
9/11